Dell Latitude XPi CD Troubleshooting guide

Dell® Latitude® XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
®
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
 1994–1996 Dell Computer Corporation. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Latitude are registered trademarks, Dell Dimension and DeskDock are trademarks, and
DellWare is a registered service mark of Dell Computer Corporation; Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks and
Windows for Workgroups is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation; Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; PRODIGY is
a registered trademark of Prodigy Services Co.; CompuServe is a registered trademark of CompuServe, Inc.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell
Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
September 1996
P/N 30268
Safety Instructions
U
se the following safety guidelines to help protect
your computer from potential damage and to help ensure
•
Protect your computer, battery, and hard-disk drive
from environmental hazards such as dirt, dust, food,
liquids, temperature extremes, and overexposure to
sunlight.
•
When you move your computer between environments with very different temperature and/or
humidity ranges, condensation may form on or
within the computer. To avoid damaging the computer, allow sufficient time for the moisture to
evaporate before using the computer.
your own personal safety.
When Using Your Computer
As you use your computer, observe the following safety
guidelines:
•
When setting up the computer for work, place it on a
level surface.
•
When traveling, do not check the computer as baggage. You can put your computer through an X-ray
security machine, but never put your computer
through a metal detector. If you have the computer
checked by hand, be sure to have a charged battery
available in case you are asked to turn on the
computer.
•
When traveling with the hard-disk drive removed
from the computer, wrap the drive in a nonconducting
material, such as cloth or paper. If you have the drive
checked by hand, be ready to install the drive in the
computer. You can put the hard-disk drive through an
X-ray security machine, but never put the drive
through a metal detector.
•
When traveling, do not place the computer in overhead storage compartments where it could slide
around. Do not drop your computer or subject it to
other mechanical shocks.
•
Do not carry a battery in your pocket, purse, or other
container where metal objects (such as car keys)
could short-circuit the battery terminals. The resulting excessive current flow can cause extremely high
temperatures and may result in damage from burns.
CAUTION: When taking the computer from
low-temperature conditions into a warmer
environment or from high-temperature conditions into a cooler environment, allow the
computer to acclimate to room temperature
before turning on power.
•
If using alternating current (AC) power, plug the AC
adapter power cable into a properly grounded power
source. Be sure that nothing rests on your adapter’s
power cable and that the cable is not located where it
can be tripped over or stepped on.
•
When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector
or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. As
you pull out the connector, keep it evenly aligned to
avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you
connect a cable make sure both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned.
•
Do not attempt to service the computer yourself.
Always follow installation instructions closely.
•
Handle components with care. Hold a component
such as a memory module by its edges, not its pins.
•
When removing a memory module from the system
board or disconnecting a peripheral device from the
v
computer, wait five seconds after turning off the
computer before removing the memory module or
disconnecting the device to help avoid possible damage to the system board.
•
Before you clean your computer, turn it off, unplug it
from its power source, and remove the battery.
•
Clean your computer with a soft cloth dampened
with water rather than with liquid or aerosol
cleaners.
Clean the display with a soft, clean cloth and commercial window cleaner that does not contain wax or
abrasives. Apply the cleaner to the cloth; then stroke
the cloth across the display in one direction, moving
from the top of the display to the bottom. If the display contains grease or some other contaminant, use
isopropyl alcohol instead of commercial window
cleaner.
•
If your computer gets wet or is damaged, follow the
procedures described in Chapter 3, “Troubleshooting
Your Computer.” If, after following these procedures,
you confirm that your computer is not operating properly, contact Dell Computer Corporation. (See
Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for the appropriate telephone number.)
Ergonomic Computing Habits
WARNING: Improper or prolonged keyboard use
may result in injury.
For comfort and efficiency, observe the following ergonomic guidelines when setting up and using your
computer:
•
Position your computer directly in front of you as
you work.
•
Adjust the tilt of the computer’s display, its contrast
and/or brightness settings, and the lighting around
you (such as overhead lights, desk lamps, and the
curtains or blinds on nearby windows) to minimize
reflections and glare on the display.
vi
•
When using an external monitor with your computer,
set the monitor at a comfortable viewing distance
(usually 510 to 610 millimeters [20 to 24 inches]
from your eyes). Make sure the monitor screen is at
eye level or slightly lower when you are sitting in
front of the monitor.
•
•
Use a chair that provides good lower back support.
•
Always use the palmrest with the keyboard or trackball. Leave space to rest your hands when using an
external mouse.
•
•
Let your upper arms hang naturally at your sides.
•
When sitting, make sure the weight of your legs is on
your feet and not on the front of your chair seat.
Adjust your chair’s height or use a footrest, if necessary, to maintain proper posture.
•
Vary your work activities. Try to organize your work
so that you do not have to type for extended periods
without stopping. When you stop typing, try to do
things that use both hands.
Keep your forearms horizontal with your wrists in a
neutral, comfortable position while using the keyboard, trackball, or external mouse.
Sit erect with your feet resting on the floor and your
thighs level.
When Removing or Installing
Memory Modules
Before removing or installing memory modules, perform
the following steps in the sequence indicated.
CAUTION: The only time you should ever access
the inside of your computer is when you are installing memory modules. Wait five seconds after
turning off the computer before disconnecting a
peripheral device or removing a memory module to
help prevent possible damage to the system board.
1.
Turn off your computer and any attached
peripherals.
2.
Disconnect your computer and peripherals from
AC power to reduce the potential for personal
injury or shock. Also, disconnect any telephone or
telecommunication line from the computer.
3.
Remove the battery from the battery
compartment.
wrists relaxed and flat
4.
Open the input/output (I/O) panel door on the
back of your computer, and ground yourself by
touching the unpainted metal surface of the I/O
connector.
While you work, periodically touch the I/O panel to
dissipate any static electricity that might harm
internal components.
computer positioned
directly in front of user
arms at desk level
vii
Protecting Against Electrostatic
Discharge
Static electricity can harm electronic components inside
your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static
electricity from your body before you touch any of your
computer’s electronic components, such as a memory
module. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal
surface on the computer’s I/O panel.
As you continue to work inside the computer, periodically touch an I/O connector to remove any static charge
your body may have accumulated.
In addition to the preceding precautions, you can also
take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD):
•
viii
When unpacking a static-sensitive component from its
shipping carton, do not remove the component from
the antistatic packing material until you are ready to
install the component. Just before unwrapping the
antistatic packaging, be sure to discharge static electricity from your body.
•
When transporting a sensitive component, first place
it in an antistatic container or packaging.
•
Handle all sensitive components in a static-safe area.
If possible, use antistatic floor pads and workbench
pads.
The following caution may appear throughout this document to remind you of these precautions:
CAUTION: See “Protecting Against Electrostatic
Discharge” in the safety instructions at the front of
this guide.
Preface
About This Guide
This guide is intended for anyone who uses the Dell
Latitude XPi CD portable computer. It can be used by
both first-time and experienced computer users who want
to learn about the features of the computer. This guide
also provides basic troubleshooting procedures and
instructions for using the diskette-based diagnostics to
test your computer and its components.
•
Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” describes the help tools
Dell provides to assist you if you have a problem
with the computer. It also explains how and when to
call Dell for technical assistance.
•
Appendix A, “Technical Specifications,” is intended
primarily as reference material if you are interested
in learning more about the details of your computer.
•
Appendix B, “Diagnostic Video Tests,” provides
samples of screens displayed when the Video Test
Group of the diskette-based diagnostics is run. These
screens help you check a particular video function or
group of functions on the built-in display or on an
external monitor.
•
Appendix C, “Regulatory Notices,” is for users who
are interested in which regulatory agencies have
tested and approved the Dell Latitude XPi CD
portable computer.
•
Appendix D, “Warranties and Return Policy,”
describes the warranty and return policy for the Dell
computer.
Summaries of the chapters and appendixes of this guide
follow:
•
Chapter 1, “Introduction,” gives an overview of the
computer features and a list of available upgrades.
•
Chapter 2, “Customizing System Features,”
describes how to change system settings, such as
those that control the computer’s power conservation
features. This chapter also describes system utilities
and video drivers included with the computer.
•
Chapter 3, “Troubleshooting Your Computer,” provides some initial checks and procedures you can use
to solve basic computer problems and some general
guidelines on analyzing software problems. This
chapter also discusses messages and beep codes.
•
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,”
describes how to check the computer’s hardware and
use the Dell diagnostics to isolate component
problems.
Warranty and Return Policy
Information
Dell Computer Corporation (“Dell”) manufactures its
hardware products from parts and components that are
new or equivalent to new in accordance with industrystandard practices.
For information about the Dell warranty and return policy, see Appendix D, “Warranties and Return Policy.”
ix
Other Documents You May Need
Besides this Reference and Troubleshooting Guide, the following online documentation is included with your
computer:
The Windows-based System User’s Guide contains essential information you need to use your
portable computer. Look for the System User’s
Guide icon in the Dell Accessories folder or group.
The Dell Q&A provides quick and detailed
answers to the questions most commonly asked
about using a portable computer. Read this online
document before calling Dell for technical assistance. Look
for the Dell Q&A icon in the Dell Accessories folder or
group.
reference material intended for experienced users or
technicians.
Notational Conventions
The following subsections list notational conventions
used in this document.
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Throughout this guide, there may be blocks of text
printed in color or in italic type. These blocks are warnings, cautions, and notes, and they are used as follows:
WARNING: A WARNING indicates the potential
for bodily harm and tells you how to avoid the
problem.
The Dell DiskMaker helps you with one of the
most critical parts of setting up your system—
creating program diskette sets. Look for the
Dell DiskMaker icon in the Dell Accessories folder or
group.
The Dell Service and Support Policies provides
information about service and support policies,
guarantees, and warranties (in the United
States only). Look for the Dell Services and Support Policies icon in the Dell Accessories folder or group.
You may also have one or more of the following
documents.
NOTE: Documentation updates are sometimes included
with your computer to describe changes to your computer or software. Always read these updates before
consulting any other documentation because the updates
contain the latest information.
•
•
•
x
Operating system documentation is included if you
ordered your operating system software from Dell.
This documentation describes how to install (if necessary), configure, and use your operating system
software.
Documentation is included with any options you
purchase separately from your computer. This documentation includes information that you need to
configure and install these options in your Dell
computer.
“Readme” files may be installed on your hard-disk
drive to provide last-minute updates about technical
changes to your computer or advanced technical
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential
damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you
how to avoid the problem.
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that
helps you make better use of your computer.
Typographical Conventions
The following list defines (where appropriate) and illustrates typographical conventions used as visual cues for
specific elements of text throughout this document:
•
Keycaps, the labeling that appears on the keys on a
keyboard, are presented in uppercase and enclosed in
angle brackets.
Example: <ENTER>
•
Key combinations are series of keys to be pressed
simultaneously (unless otherwise indicated) to perform a single function.
Example: <CTRL><ALT><ENTER>
•
All items on a menu screen are presented in the
ARIAL font and in uppercase bold.
Example: SPEAKER VOLUME category
•
Commands presented in lowercase bold are for reference purposes only and are not intended to be
typed at that particular point in the discussion.
•
Example: “Use the format command to . . . .”
In contrast, commands presented in the Courier
New font are intended to be typed as part of an
instruction.
Example: del c:\myfile.doc
•
Example: “Type format to format the diskette in
drive A.”
•
Filenames and directory names are presented in
lowercase bold.
Syntax lines consist of a command and all its possible parameters. Commands are displayed in
lowercase bold; variable parameters (those for which
you substitute a value) are displayed in lowercase
italics; constant parameters are displayed in lowercase bold. The brackets indicate items that are
optional.
Screen text is text that appears on the screen of your
display or external monitor. It can be a system message, for example, or it can be text that you are
instructed to type as part of a command (referred to
as a command line). Screen text is presented in the
Courier New font.
Example: The following message appears on your
screen:
Examples: autoexec.bat and c:\windows
•
Command lines consist of a command and may
include one or more of the command’s possible
parameters. Command lines are presented in the
Courier New font.
No boot device available
•
Variables are symbols for which you substitute a
value. They are presented in italics.
Example: module n (where n represents the memory
module number)
Example: del [drive:] [[path]filename] [/p]
xi
xii
Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Hardware Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Interchanging Hard-Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Available Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Accessing Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Chapter 2
Customizing System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
About System Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Accessing the Dell Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Using the System Setup Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Working With System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
System Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Admin Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Alarm Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Asset Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
BIOS Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Boot Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Disk Time-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Diskette Drive A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Display Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
xiii
Display Time-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Expansion Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
External Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Infrared Data Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Integrated Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
IntelliSpin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Internal Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Keyboard Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Lower PC Card Socket and Upper PC Card Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Microprocessor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Monitor Toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Parallel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Primary Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Replicator Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Replicator SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Ring/Event Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Ring Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
S2D Time-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Serial Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Service Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Smart CPU Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Speaker Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Suspend Time-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
System Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Video Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
System Utilities and Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Asset Tag Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Assigning, Changing, and Deleting an Asset Tag Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Configuring PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Suspend-to-Disk Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Removing the S2D Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Creating the S2D Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
xiv
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Backing Up Your Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Basic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Checking Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Look and Listen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
System Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Messages and Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
System Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Finding Software Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Installing and Configuring Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Initialization or Startup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Expanded and Extended Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Using Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Input Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Memory-Resident Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Program Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Avoiding Interrupt Assignment Conflicts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Memory Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
I/O Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Troubleshooting a Wet Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Troubleshooting a Damaged Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Troubleshooting a Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Total Power Failure When Using the AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Total Power Failure When Using the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
No Power to a Part of the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Troubleshooting the Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Troubleshooting the CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Troubleshooting the Hard-Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Troubleshooting an External Keyboard or External Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Troubleshooting Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Troubleshooting the Built-In Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Troubleshooting an External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
xv
Troubleshooting Serial and Parallel Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the Basic I/O Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting a Parallel Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the Infrared Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Audio Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-30
Chapter 4
Running the Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Features of the Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
When to Use the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Before You Start Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Starting the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
How to Use the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Confirming the System Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to Use the Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Subtest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Run Under Subtest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Select Under Subtest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Options Under Subtest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Test Limits Under Subtest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
About Under Subtest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Key-Help Under Subtest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Quit Menu Under Subtest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Number of Times to Repeat Test(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Maximum Errors Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Pause for User Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Output Device for Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Output Device for Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Test Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
About. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Key-Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Tests in the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
xvi
RAM Test Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Why Run a RAM Test? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
System Set Test Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Why Run a System Set Test? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Video Test Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Why Run a Video Test? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Keyboard Test Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Why Run a Keyboard Test? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Mouse Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Why Run the Mouse Test?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Diskette Drives Test Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Why Run a Diskette Drives Test? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Hard-Disk Drives (Non-SCSI) Test Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Why Run a Hard-Disk Drives Test? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
IDE CD ROM Drives Test Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Why Run an IDE CD ROM Drives Test? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Serial/Infrared Ports Test Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Why Run a Serial/Infrared Ports Test? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Parallel Ports Test Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Why Run a Parallel Ports Test? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
SCSI Devices Test Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Why Run a SCSI Devices Test?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Network Interface Test Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Why Run a Network Interface Test? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Audio Test Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Why Run an Audio Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
xvii
Chapter 5
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dell Q&A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System User’s Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference and Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
World Wide Web on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commercial Online Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dell Diagnostics Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AutoTech Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TechFax Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TechConnect BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automated Order-Status System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems With Your Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dell Contact Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-7
Appendix A
Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Appendix B
Diagnostic Video Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Video Memory Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Video Hardware Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Text Mode Character Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Character Attributes Subtest (80 x 25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Character Set Subtest (80 x 25). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Character Attributes Subtest (40 x 25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Character Set Subtest (40 x 25). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Text Mode Color Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Color Attributes Subtest (80 x 25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Color Attributes Subtest (40 x 25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Color Bars Subtest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Text Mode Pages Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
xviii
Graphics Mode Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
320 x 200 Graphics Mode Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
320 x 200 16-Color Graphics Mode Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
640 x 200 16-Color Graphics Mode Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
640 x 350 16-Color Graphics Mode Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
640 x 480 2-Color Graphics Mode Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
640 x 480 16-Color Graphics Mode Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
320 x 200 256-Color Graphics Mode Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
640 x 480 256-Color Graphics Mode Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
800 x 600 16-Color Graphics Mode Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
800 x 600 256-Color Graphics Mode Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
1024 x 768 16-Color Graphics Mode Screen (External Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
1024 x 768 256-Color Graphics Mode Screen (External Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Color Palettes Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Solid Colors Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-6
Appendix C
Regulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
FCC Class B Notice (U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Modem Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
Type of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
Telephone Company Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
If Problems Arise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
Installation and Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
Load Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
IC Notice (Canada Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
Canadian Modem Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
CE Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
VCCI Notices (Japan only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Class 1 Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Class 2 Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Korean Regulatory Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Class A Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
Class B Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
Polish Center for Testing and Certification Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
Ωψµαγανια Πολσκιεγο Χεντρυµ Βαδα〉 ι Χερτψφικαχϕι . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
Ποζοστα≥ε ινστρυκχϕε βεζ πιεχζε〉στωα . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
xix
Appendix D
Warranties and Return Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Limited Three-Year Warranty (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Coverage During Year One. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Coverage During Years Two and Three . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Limited Three-Year Warranty (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Coverage During Year One. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Coverage During Years Two and Three . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Limited One-Year Warranty (U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Limited One-Year Warranty (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
“Total Satisfaction” Return Policy (U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Index
Figures
Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-2.
Figure 2-1.
Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-3.
Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-2.
Figure 5-1.
Figure B-1.
Figure B-2.
Figure B-3.
Front View of the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Back View of the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
AC Adapter and Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Removing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Main Screen of the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Diagnostics Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
80-Column x 25-Line Character Set Subtest Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
40-Column x 25-Line Character Set Subtest Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
640 x 480 2-Color Graphics Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Tables
Table 2-1.
Table 3-1.
Table 3-2.
Table 3-3.
Table 3-4.
Table 3-5.
Table 3-6.
xx
System Setup Navigation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Boot Routine Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
System Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
IRQ Line Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Conventional Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Upper Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Table 3-7.
Table 4-1.
Table 4-2.
Table 4-3.
Table 5-1.
Table 5-2.
Table 5-3.
Table A-1.
Table B-1.
I/O Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Option Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Dell Diagnostics Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
RAM Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Help Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
International Dialing Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Dell Contact Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
Color Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
xxi
xxii
Chapter 1
Introduction
T
he Dell Latitude XPi CD portable computer is
an expandable multimedia system designed around an
®
®
Intel® Pentium® microprocessor and Peripheral
Component Interconnect (PCI) technology. This chapter
describes the major hardware and software features of
your computer.
display latch
display
indicator panel
keyboard
trackball
microphone
tilt-support foot
(on each side of display)
front infrared port
battery
speaker
diskette drive
CD-ROM drive
Figure 1-1. Front View of the Computer
Introduction
1-1
hard-disk drive
indicator panel
audio jacks
I/O panel
PC Card slot
back infrared port
speaker
Advanced Port Replicator connector
power switch
tilt-support foot
AC adapter connector
Figure 1-2. Back View of the Computer
Hardware Features
— Hardware wavetable support and 3D audio spatializer with software-controlled treble and bass
Your Dell computer has the following features:
•
•
— Soundblaster-Pro compatible voice and music
functions
A Pentium microprocessor running at 150 megahertz
(MHz) and a 12.1-inch super video graphics array
(SVGA) active-matrix color display.
Full multimedia capability through the following
standard features:
— A built-in CD-ROM drive
— Jacks for connecting external speakers, headphones, or a microphone to your computer
— Built-in microphone and stereo speakers
•
— 128-bit hardware accelerated video support
— Software Motion Picture Experts Group
(MPEG) software that lets you view MPEG-1
video clips on your monitor and provides
synchronized audio playback through the
computer’s sound system
1-2
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Sixteen megabytes (MB) of nonremovable extendeddata out (EDO) memory on the system board. Memory modules offer improved performance by using a
shorter page-mode cycle time while accessing data
within a single page of memory. Memory can be
increased up to 48 MB by installing combinations of
4-, 8-, and 16-MB fast-page-mode memory modules
in the two memory module sockets on the system
board.
•
•
•
A 256-kilobyte (KB) static random-access memory
(SRAM) external cache (also called level 2, or L2,
cache). Cache memory enhances the speed of many
microprocessor operations by storing the most
recently accessed contents of system memory.
Two power conservation modes—suspend mode and
suspend-to-disk mode—which help you conserve battery
power. If the batteries run out of power, suspend-to-disk
mode prevents data loss by copying all system data to the
hard-disk drive and turning off the computer.
Support for two 3.3-volt (V) or 5-V PC Cards that
adhere to Release 2.01 of the PCMCIA (Personal
Computer Memory Card International Association)
standard and Release 4.2 of the JEIDA (Japanese
Electronic Industry Development Association)
standard.
NOTE: The PC Card controller supports the CardBus standard for 32-bit data transfer on PC Card.
•
•
with the Infrared Data Association (IrDA) Standard 1.1 (Fast IR) for use with external devices.
•
An integrated audio controller that provides sound
functions and is SoundBlasterPro-compatible.
•
Three sound jacks that support an external microphone, headphones, speakers, and record/playback
devices.
•
A built-in keyboard that has special keys for use with
the Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system.
Software Features
The following software is included if Dell installed one
of these operating systems on your computer’s hard-disk
drive: Windows 95, Microsoft Windows 3.x, Microsoft
Windows NT®, or Windows for Workgroups™:
Hardware and software support for the Dell Latitude
XPi Advanced Port Replicator, which integrates
your portable computer into a desktop environment.
The replicator also supports Ethernet or Token Ring
network connections and small computer system
interface (SCSI) devices, such as tape drives and
hard-disk drives.
•
System Setup options and system utilities that let
you customize the operation of your computer. For
more information, see Chapter 2, “Customizing System Features.”
•
Dell diagnostics for evaluating your computer’s
components and devices. For more information, see
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”
A lithium ion battery that charges in approximately
1.5 hours (when the computer is off or in suspend
mode).
NOTE: If Dell installed MS-DOS® only on your harddisk drive, the System Setup options and system utilities
are in a diskette kit that accompanied the computer.
Customers who installed their own operating system
can order this diskette kit from Dell. To order, see Chapter 5,“Getting Help,” for the appropriate telephone
number in your location.
NOTE: You can use the lithium ion battery with any
Dell XP or XPi portable computer. Do not attempt to
use the battery with other computers.
WARNING: Do not puncture or incinerate the
battery or dispose of it in a landfill. Instead,
return the battery to Dell for recyling and
disposal.
•
High-performance parallel and serial ports, and a
multipurpose Personal System/2 (PS/2) connector
for attaching external devices. There is also a monitor connector for attaching an external monitor to
your computer.
•
Two infrared ports that permit file transfer without
using cable connections. The ports are compatible
Before turning on your computer for the first time, read
all license agreements that came with your computer.
When you turn on your computer for the first time, if you
agree with the license terms, indicate your acceptance by
typing y when prompted by the computer. Then complete
the installation of your operating system.
Next, use the Dell DiskMaker in the Dell Accessories
folder or group to create program diskette sets of your
installed software. A program diskette set contains the
complete software package on diskettes. These diskettes
can be used to reinstall or reconfigure the software if
necessary.
Introduction
1-3
Interchanging Hard-Disk Drives
The removable hard-disk drives in the new Dell Latitude
XPi CD computers are interchangeable with drives from
other XP and XPi computers. For instructions on removing and installing hard-disk drives, see “Hard-Disk
Drive” in the online System User’s Guide.
You can also use the hard-disk drive from Dell Latitude
XP and XPi computers in your new Dell Latitude XPi
CD. Before using the drive, however, you must update it
with video drivers and utilities designed for your new
computer. To update the drive, call Dell to purchase a
drive configuration upgrade kit, which includes diskettes
with the necessary files and instructions for performing
the update procedure. A separate utility is also available
on the Dell Bulletin Board Service (BBS). For instructions on calling Dell and accessing the Dell BBS, see
Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”
Available Options
As your computing requirements change, you can extend
your computer’s capabilities with the Advanced Port
Replicator or by connecting external devices. You can
also install a hard-disk drive of larger capacity, increase
system memory, and add functionality with PC Cards.
•
•
1-4
Auto adapter (for powering the computer from the
cigarette lighter in your car)
Instructions for connecting or installing these options are
contained in the online System User’s Guide or are
included in the upgrade kit you receive from Dell.
Accessing Online
Documentation
The online System User’s Guide installed on your harddisk drive contains information about the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System features
Traveling with the computer
Customizing system configuration
Powering the computer and extending battery life
Using internal and external devices
Maintaining the system
Contacting Dell
The guide also contains a glossary of commonly used
computer terms and abbreviations.
Dell offers the following devices and upgrade options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Carrying case
To access this guide, select the System User’s
Guide icon in the Dell Accessories folder or
program group.
Advanced Port Replicator (Token Ring or Ethernet)
Dell DeskDock™
External keyboards and a numeric keypad
To print any screen from the online System User’s Guide,
display the screen you want and select PRINT TOPIC from
the File menu.
External monitors
NOTE: Text in pop-up windows cannot be printed.
Additional batteries
External pointing devices
External speakers, headphones, and microphones
Printers
Hard-disk drives
Battery charger
AC adapter
PC Cards
Getting Help
If at any time you don’t understand a procedure described
in this guide, or if your computer does not perform as
expected, Dell provides a number of tools to help you.
For more information on these help tools, see Chapter 5,
“Getting Help.”
4-, 8-, and 16-MB memory modules
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Chapter 2
Customizing System Features
A
s your computing environment changes, you may
want to customize the configuration of your computer.
The system setup options and system utilities let you control various hardware and software features of your
computer as well as reduce power consumption when
your computer is running on battery power. This chapter
explains how to access and use system setup options and
system utilities.
About System Setup Options
Your computer retains system configuration information
in nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM) that is
maintained by your computer’s reserve battery. Each
time you turn on your computer, it compares the installed
hardware with the system configuration information
stored in NVRAM. If the system detects a discrepancy, it
generates an error message for each incorrect configuration setting.
You can use the system setup options as follows:
•
To set or change user-selectable features—for example, power management features or security features
•
To verify information about your computer’s current
configuration, such as the amount of system memory
•
To change your system configuration information
after you add, change, or remove hardware connected to or installed inside your computer
After you set up your computer, run through the system
setup options to become familiar with them and to verify
that their settings are correct. Record the system setup
settings for reference in case you need to reestablish
them.
You can access these options in two ways:
•
•
The Dell Control Center (Windows-based)
System Setup program (MS-DOS–based)
Accessing the Dell Control
Center
You can access the Dell Control Center
from the Dell Accessories folder or group.
See the topic titled “Customizing System
Configurations” in your online System
User’s Guide for more information about
the setup options in the Dell Control Center. The Dell
Control Center also contains detailed help that gives you
all the information you need to set options.
Using the System Setup Program
Options in the System Setup program appear on two
screens, Page 1 and Page 2 (illustrated in Figure 2-1).
For some system setup options, you must reboot the computer before any changes take effect. Changes for other
options take effect immediately.
NOTE: If the System Setup program is running when the
computer enters suspend mode, the computer exits the
System Setup program and then activates suspend mode.
NOTE: If you change an option that is activated by
rebooting, the System Setup program displays the setting
you selected rather than the setting currently in effect.
You must reboot for the new setting to take effect.
Enter and use the System Setup program as follows:
If you are using Windows 95, press <FN><F1> at any time
on the built-in keyboard (or <CTRL><ALT><ENTER> on
an external keyboard from an MS-DOS window).
Customizing System Features
2-1
If you change the setting of an option that requires
rebooting in order to take effect, exit the operating system before rebooting. (The Help text in the upper-right
corner of the System Setup screens tells you if the computer must be rebooted.) If the new setting does not
require rebooting to take effect, press <ESC> to exit the
System Setup program.
If you change the setting of an option that requires
rebooting in order to take effect, press
<CTRL><ALT><DEL> to reboot. (The Help text in the
upper-right corner of the System Setup screens tells you
if the computer must be rebooted.) If the new setting does
not require rebooting to take effect, press <ESC> to exit
the System Setup program.
NOTE: To ensure an orderly system shutdown, consult
the documentation that accompanied your operating
system.
CAUTION: Never use the <ALT><B> key combination to exit the System Setup program. Doing so
could cause the loss of data and may corrupt file
systems.
If you are using Windows 3.x, Windows for Workgroups,
Windows NT, or any other operating system that is not
Plug and Play aware, do not enter the System Setup program from an MS-DOS window. Instead, close all open
application programs and exit the operating system. Then
reboot the computer and press <FN><F1> immediately
after the computer’s speakers emit a beep. If you wait too
long and your operating system begins to load into memory, let the system complete the load operation; then shut
down the system and try again.
NOTE: To ensure an orderly system shutdown, consult
the documentation that accompanied your operating
system.
CAUTION: Never use the <ALT><B> key combination to exit the System Setup program. Doing so
could cause the loss of data and may corrupt file
systems.
If you are using MS-DOS only, press <FN><F1> at any
time on the built-in keyboard (or <CTRL><ALT><ENTER>
on an external keyboard). If you change the setting of an
option that requires rebooting in order to take effect,
press <ALT><B> to reboot. (The Help text in the upperright corner of the System Setup screens tells you if the
computer must be rebooted.) If the setting does not
require rebooting to take effect, press <ESC> to exit the
System Setup program.
Working With System Setup Screens
The System Setup screens display the current setup and
configuration information and optional settings for your
computer. Information on the screens is organized in five
boxed areas:
•
Title
The box at the top of both screens lists the page number, the system name, and the version number of the
basic input/output system (BIOS).
2-2
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
•
Options
The box on the left half of both screens lists options
that define the installed hardware in your computer
(Page 1) and the power conservation and security
features for your computer (Page 2).
Fields next to the options contain settings or values.
You can change those values that appear bright on
the screen. Options or values that you cannot change
(because they are determined or calculated by the
computer) appear less bright.
•
Computer data
The box in the lower-right corner of both screens
displays information about your computer.
•
Keys
Action
Moves to the next field.
Moves to the previous field.
or
Help
The box on the upper-right half of both screens displays help information for the option with a currently
highlighted field.
•
Table 2-1. System Setup Navigation Keys
Key functions
The line of boxes across the bottom of both screens
lists keys and their functions within the System
Setup program.
Table 2-1 lists the keys you use to view or change information on the System Setup screens and to exit the
program.
For a detailed explanation of each option, see “System
Setup Options” found later in this section.
or
Cycles through available settings for an option.
Switches back and forth
between Page 1 and Page 2.
Exits the System Setup program without rebooting the
computer and returns the system to its previous state. If you
changed options that do not
take effect immediately, the
changes are recorded but do
not take effect until you reboot
the computer.
Exits the System Setup program
and reboots the computer,
implementing any changes you
made. Use this key combination
only if you entered the System
Setup program from MS-DOS.
Customizing System Features
2-3
title box
options
help
Dell Computer Corporation
Page 1 of 2
Dell Latitude XPi CD System Setup
Time: 13:17:02
Date: Mon Feb 12, 1997
Internal Hard Drive: 1216 MB
Diskette Drive A: 3.5 inch, 1.44 MB
Boot Speed: 150 MHz
Boot Sequence: Diskette First
Speaker Volume: High
Keyboard Click: Disabled
Serial Port: COM1
Infrared Data Port: Disabled
Parallel Mode: Bidirectional
Integrated Trackball: Enabled
Upper PC Card Socket: Not Installed
Lower PC Card Socket: Not installed
Monitor Toggle: Enabled
Replicator SCSI:
Replicator Network:
Ring Speed:
This category sets the time in 24-hour
format (hours:minutes:seconds) for the
internal clock/calendar.
To change the value in a field, enter
digits or use the left- or right-arrow
key to decrease or increase the value.
Changes take effect immediately.
Enabled
Enabled
16 mbps
Tab,Shift-Tab change fields
change values
Microprocessor:
System Memory:
Video Memory:
External Cache:
Expansion Device:
Service Tag:
Asset Tag:
Alt-P next
Power Management:
Display Time-Out:
Disk Time-Out:
Suspend Time-Out:
S2D Time-Out:
Smart CPU Mode:
Brightness:
Ring/Event Resume:
Alarm Resume:
Display Close:
System Switch:
Battery Status:
IntelliSpin:
Primary Password:
Admin Password:
Esc exit
Alt-B reboot
Dell Computer Corporation
Dell Latitude XPi CD System Setup
BIOS Version: AXX
AC
BATTERY
Disabled
Enabled
When set to DISABLED, this category
Disabled
4 minutes
disables all power management features.
Disabled
1 minute
The default setting is ENABLED.
Disabled
10 minutes
Disabled
8 hours
A change in this category takes effect
Disabled
Enabled
immediately.
High
Low
Enabled
Enabled
SUSPEND
ON/OFF
Display
High Performance
Microprocessor:
System Memory:
Video Memory:
External Cache:
Expansion Device:
Service Tag:
Asset Tag:
Pentium-150
16 MB
1.1 MB
256 KB
Not installed
XXXXX
XXXXX
Disabled
Disabled
Tab,Shift-Tab change fields
change values
Figure 2-1. System Setup Screens
2-4
Pentium-150
16 MB
1.1 MB
256 KB
Not installed
XXXXX
XXXXX
computer information
key functions
Page 2 of 2
BIOS Version: AXX XXX
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Alt-P next
Esc exit
Alt-B reboot
System Setup Options
The following subsections explain in detail each of the
system setup options found in the System Setup program.
The subsections are alphabetized to make it easy for you
to find the appropriate option.
AC
AC is one of the categories of POWER MANAGEMENT. You
application programs. In order for the alarms in these
programs to work, the ALARM RESUME option must be
set to ENABLED.
Settings for this option are:
•
ENABLED (the default) is used to resume normal
operation when the computer detects an alarm.
•
DISABLED keeps the computer in suspend or standby
mode even if the computer detects an alarm.
can set different time-outs for the following options when
you operate your computer from alternating current (AC)
power: DISPLAY TIME-OUT, DISK TIME-OUT, SUSPEND
TIME-OUT, S2D TIME-OUT, SMART CPU MODE, and
BRIGHTNESS.
A change to the ALARM RESUME option takes effect
immediately (rebooting is not required).
A change to the AC option takes effect immediately
(rebooting is not required).
The ASSET TAG option displays the asset tag code if you
or your organization assigned one to your computer.
Admin Password
See “Asset Tag Utility” found later in this chapter for
information on assigning an asset tag code.
displays the current status of your
administrator password and allows you to assign or
change this password. Settings for this option are:
ADMIN PASSWORD
•
DISABLED
•
ENABLED indicates that an administrator password is
currently assigned.
(the default) indicates that no administrator password is assigned.
The administrator password is designed for use by system administrators and service technicians in corporate
environments. If an administrator password is assigned,
you can use it to access the computer even if you do not
know the primary password.
CAUTION: The password features provide a high
level of security for the data in your computer.
However, they are not foolproof. If your data
requires more security, it is your responsibility to
obtain and use additional forms of protection, such
as data encryption programs or PC Cards with
encryption features.
Alarm Resume
The ALARM RESUME option directs the computer to
resume normal operation when it is in suspend mode or
standby mode and detects an alarm from the real-time
clock (RTC). Such alarms can be set through various
Asset Tag
Battery
BATTERY is one of the categories of POWER MANAGEMENT. You can set different time-outs for the following
options when you operate your computer from battery
power: DISPLAY TIME-OUT, DISK TIME-OUT, SUSPEND
TIME-OUT, S2D TIME-OUT, SMART CPU MODE, and
BRIGHTNESS.
A change to the BATTERY option takes effect immediately
(rebooting is not required).
Battery Status
BATTERY STATUS is set to DISPLAY. There are no userselectable settings for this option. The battery gauge
illustration shows the approximate percentage of charge
remaining in your battery. If there is no battery installed
in your computer, the battery gauge illustration says
Battery Not Installed.
If you are not in the System Setup program, you can see
the battery gauge illustration at any time by pressing
<FN><F3>.
BIOS Version
displays the version number and release
date of the BIOS in your computer. A service technician
BIOS VERSION
Customizing System Features
2-5
may ask you for this version number if you call Dell for
technical assistance.
NOTE: Dell may periodically offer revisions of the BIOS
that add features or solve specific problems. Because the
BIOS for your computer is stored on a reprogrammable
flash-memory chip, you can use the Flash BIOS Update
program to update your computer’s BIOS entirely
through software.
Boot Sequence
BOOT SEQUENCE determines
which disk device your
computer uses to find the software needed to start the
operating system.
when you exit the System Setup program. If you start the
System Setup program again during your current work
session, the processing speed displayed for the BOOT
SPEED option may not match the actual speed at which
your computer is running.
For a change in the BOOT SPEED option to take effect,
you must reboot your computer.
Brightness
BRIGHTNESS allows you to specify the brightness of the
display when the computer is operating on battery power.
Settings for this option are HIGH, MEDIUM, and LOW (the
default).
The term boot refers to the computer’s start-up procedure. When you turn on the computer, it “bootstraps”
itself into an operational state by loading into memory a
small program, which in turn loads the necessary operating system. BOOT SEQUENCE tells the computer where to
find the files that it needs to load.
NOTE: When your computer is operating on AC power,
this option is set to HIGH and cannot be changed.
Settings for this option are:
Date
•
DATE
(the default) causes your computer
to first attempt to boot from a bootable diskette.
DISKETTE FIRST
If the computer detects no diskette in the diskette
drive, it tries to boot from the hard-disk drive. If the
computer encounters a diskette without the required
boot files or detects a problem with the diskette
drive, it displays an error message.
•
HARD DISK ONLY causes your computer to boot only
from the hard-disk drive.
If it fails to boot from the hard-disk drive for any reason, your computer does not attempt to boot from the
diskette drive.
For a change in the BOOT SEQUENCE option to take
effect, you must reboot your computer.
Boot Speed
allows you to choose between the computer’s processing speed (the default) and COMPATIBLE, a
slower compatibility speed. The compatibility speed varies, depending on the configuration of your system.
BOOT SPEED
A change to the BRIGHTNESS option becomes effective
immediately (rebooting is not required).
Your computer automatically displays the day of the
week corresponding to the settings in the three fields that
follow (month, day-of-the-month, and year).
A change to the DATE option becomes effective immediately (rebooting is not required). However, you must
reboot to make the change apparent to the operating
system.
To change the date, press the right-arrow key to increase
the number in the highlighted field, or press the leftarrow key to decrease the number. If you prefer, you can
type in numbers in the month and day-of-the-month
fields.
Disk Time-Out
lets you determine how long your harddisk drive remains idle before the drive motor turns off to
conserve battery power.
DISK TIME-OUT
When you change the setting in the BOOT SPEED option,
the System Setup program stores and continues to display
the new setting even if you do not reboot your computer
2-6
resets the date on the computer’s internal calendar.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
is set to DISABLED. There are no user-selectable settings for this option. Settings for BATTERY are:
AC
•
•
•
•
•
•
DISABLED
15 SECONDS
1 MINUTE
2 MINUTES
3 MINUTES
•
•
•
•
•
10 MINUTES
lets you decide how long the computer operates with no input/output (I/O) activity before
turning off the display to conserve battery power.
15 MINUTES
Settings for this option in both AC and BATTERY are:
30 MINUTES
•
•
•
•
•
5 MINUTES
1 HOUR
4 MINUTES
The default setting is 1 MINUTE. To increase battery operating time, set HARD-DISK TIME-OUT to a lower number.
However, if your software requires frequent hard-disk
drive accesses, using a higher time-out setting may save
battery power and time by minimizing the number of
times the hard-disk drive must power up.
NOTE: Set DISK TIME-OUT to DISABLED if using it causes
compatibility problems with your software.
A change to the DISK TIME-OUT option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required).
If you are not in the System Setup program, you can turn
off the hard-disk drive immediately by pressing
<FN><H>. The drive resumes normal operation automatically when it is accessed by the microprocessor.
Diskette Drive A
identifies the type of diskette drive
installed in your computer. There are no user-selectable
settings for the DISKETTE DRIVE A option.
DISKETTE DRIVE A
Display Close
lets you determine whether your computer enters suspend mode when the display is closed or
whether only the display is turned off when the display is
closed.
DISPLAY CLOSE
•
SUSPEND
•
ACTIVE
Display Time-Out
(the default) allows the computer to enter
suspend mode when the display is closed.
turns off the display, but does not put the
computer into suspend mode.
DISPLAY TIME-OUT
•
•
•
•
•
DISABLED
1 MINUTE
2 MINUTES
3 MINUTES
4 MINUTES
5 MINUTES
10 MINUTES
15 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
1 HOUR
The default setting is 4 MINUTES. To increase battery
operating time, set DISPLAY TIME-OUT to a lower number
of minutes.
NOTE: Set the DISPLAY TIME-OUT option to DISABLED if
using it causes compatibility problems with your
software.
A change to the DISPLAY TIME-OUT option takes effect
immediately (rebooting is not required).
If you are not in the System Setup program, you can turn
off the display immediately by pressing <FN><D>. The
display resumes normal operation automatically when
you press a key or move the cursor.
Expansion Device
shows the type of Dell Latitude
Advanced Port Replicator that is attached to the computer. There are no user-selectable settings for the
EXPANSION DEVICE option.
EXPANSION DEVICE
External Cache
tells you how much external cache
your computer has. There are no user-selectable settings
for the EXTERNAL CACHE option.
EXTERNAL CACHE
Infrared Data Port
allows you to avoid resource conflicts by remapping the address of the infrared ports or
disabling one or both ports.
INFRARED DATA PORT
Customizing System Features
2-7
Settings for this option are:
IntelliSpin
•
COM1: FRONT
INTELLISPIN lets you compensate for unbalanced CDs,
•
COM1: BACK
maps the infrared data port on the back
of the computer to COM1.
•
which can cause the computer to vibrate when the
CD-ROM drive is in use. This option allows you to use
discs that might otherwise be unreadable. This option is
available for CD-ROM drives with speeds of 6X or higher.
COM2: FRONT
•
COM2: BACK
•
COM3: FRONT
•
COM3: BACK
•
COM4: FRONT
•
COM4: BACK
•
DISABLED (the
maps the infrared data port on the
front of the computer to COM1.
maps the infrared data port on the
front of the computer to COM2.
maps the infrared data port on the back
of the computer to COM2.
(the default) maps the infrared data
port on the front of the computer to COM3.
maps the infrared data port on the back
of the computer to COM3.
maps the infrared data port on the
front of the computer to COM4.
maps the infrared data port on the back
of the computer to COM4.
default) disables both infrared data
ports and their assigned COM addresses. Disabling
the ports makes the interrupts available for other
serial devices to use.
For a change in the INFRARED DATA PORT option to take
effect, you must reboot your computer.
NOTE: You can use only one infrared port at a time.
Integrated Trackball
INTEGRATED TRACKBALL allows you to enable or disable
the computer’s integrated trackball.
Settings for this option are:
•
ENABLED
(the default) enables the integrated
trackball.
•
disables the integrated trackball. Use this
setting when you want to attach a serial mouse to the
computer.
DISABLED
If you attach a mouse to the Personal System/2 (PS/2)
keyboard/keypad/mouse connector, the computer automatically detects and disables the INTEGRATED
TRACKBALL option (but does not change the actual
setting).
If this option is set to HIGH PERFORMANCE (the default),
the CD-ROM drive always runs at the highest speed. If
this option is set to VARIABLE, the CD-ROM drive automatically lowers its speed to reduce or stop the vibration
caused by the unbalanced CD.
NOTE: When this option is set to VARIABLE, the
CD-ROM drive takes several seconds to determine the
proper speed. You cannot access the disc during that
time.
Internal Hard Drive
INTERNAL HARD DRIVE displays
the capacity of your
computer’s hard-disk drive. This option does not have
any user-selectable settings.
Keyboard Click
lets you choose whether the built-in
keyboard makes audible clicking sounds. The SPEAKER
VOLUME option must be enabled for this option to function. The volume of the simulated key clicks is the same
as the setting in the SPEAKER VOLUME option.
KEYBOARD CLICK
Settings for this option are DISABLED (the default) and
ENABLED.
A change to the KEYBOARD CLICK option takes effect
immediately (rebooting is not required).
Lower PC Card Socket and Upper PC Card
Socket
and UPPER PC CARD SOCKET
indicate the status of the PC Card connectors in your
computer.
LOWER PC CARD SOCKET
The possible settings for each option are:
•
For a change in the INTEGRATED TRACKBALL option to
take effect, you must reboot your computer.
2-8
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
NOT INSTALLED indicates that the computer does not
detect a PC Card in the PC Card connector or that a
PC Card is not properly installed in the connector.
•
ENABLED indicates
that the computer detects a PC
Card in the PC Card connector and that power is
available to the connector.
Options for this option are:
•
BIDIRECTIONAL
that the computer detects a PC
Card in the PC Card connector but no power is available to the connector. Use this setting to save battery
power if you are not using a PC Card that is installed
in your computer.
•
NORMAL
NOTES: A PC Card socket option must be set to ENABLED if
you want to use a PC Card in that connector.
•
EPP
•
ECP
•
DISABLED indicates
You can set this option to ENABLED or DISABLED only if
a PC Card is installed in the socket.
A change to the LOWER PC CARD SOCKET or UPPER PC
CARD SOCKET option takes effect immediately (rebooting is
not required).
Microprocessor
MICROPROCESSOR displays
the type and speed of the
microprocessor installed on your computer’s system
board. There are no user-selectable settings for this
option.
Monitor Toggle
MONITOR TOGGLE enables
and disables the <FN><F8>
key combination that sends the video image to your computer’s display, to an external monitor, or to both displays
simultaneously. (If you are using an external keyboard,
this option enables the <CTRL><ALT><F8> key combination from an MS-DOS window.)
Set this option to ENABLED (the default) to enable the
<FN><F8> (or <CTRL><ALT><F8>) key combination; set this
option to DISABLED to disable the key combination. Disable
this key combination only if it conflicts with the same key
combination used in an application program.
A change to the MONITOR TOGGLE option takes effect
immediately (rebooting is not required).
Parallel Mode
controls whether the computer’s builtin parallel port acts as a PS/2-compatible (bidirectional)
port, AT-compatible (unidirectional) port, Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP)-compatible port, or Extended
Capabilities Port (ECP)-compatible port.
PARALLEL MODE
(the default) puts the port in bidirectional mode so that the data transfer rate can be
improved by bidirectional operation, such as with a
network parallel adapter.
puts the parallel port in output mode only
(unidirectional) and is used for most devices, such as
a parallel printer.
puts the port in EPP mode to take advantage of
the functionality of EPP devices. Consult the device
documentation to select the appropriate protocol
(EPP 1.9).
puts the port in ECP mode to take advantage of
the functionality of ECP devices. Consult the device
documentation to select the appropriate protocol;
consult your operating system documentation to
determine if the operating system supports ECP
mode.
NOTE: The EPP and ECP settings also work for most
software written for the AT (unidirectional) and PS/2
(bidirectional) modes. Options that use EPP or ECP
mode may come with special drivers that need to be
installed in order to use these modes.
•
disables the parallel port and its assigned
LPT address, freeing its interrupt for another device
to use.
DISABLED
For a change in the PARALLEL MODE option to take effect,
you must reboot your computer.
Power Management
POWER MANAGEMENT allows
you to enable or disable
power conservation features when you are using battery
or AC power.
If you want to use any of the time-out options while using
battery power, the BATTERY option must be set to ENABLED.
If you want to use the time-out options while using AC power,
the AC option must be set to ENABLED.
A change to the POWER MANAGEMENT option takes effect
immediately (rebooting is not required).
Customizing System Features
2-9
Primary Password
Ring/Event Resume
PRIMARY PASSWORD
displays the current status of the
primary password and allows you to assign or change this
password.
RING/EVENT RESUME lets
Settings for this option are:
Settings for this option are:
•
DISABLED
(the default) indicates that no primary
password is assigned.
•
ENABLED
•
ENABLED
indicates that a primary password is currently assigned.
•
DISABLED
If you assign a primary password, the computer prompts
you for the password each time you boot the computer.
CAUTION: The password features provide a high
level of security for the data in your computer.
However, they are not foolproof. If your data
requires more security, it is your responsibility to
obtain and use additional forms of protection, such
as data encryption programs or PC Cards with
encryption features.
Replicator Network
allows you to configure network
drivers for use with the Advanced Port Replicator, if you
are using an operating system other than Windows 95.
When this option is set to ENABLED (the default) and
used with the is_net.exe utility, network drivers load
automatically when you boot the computer. For more
information, see the Dell Latitude XPi Advanced Port
Replicator User’s Guide.
REPLICATOR NETWORK
Replicator SCSI
allows you to configure SCSI device
drivers for use with the Advanced Port Replicator, if you
are using an operating system other than Windows 95.
When this option is set to ENABLED (the default), SCSI
drivers load automatically when you connect a SCSI
device to the replicator. For more information, see the
Dell Latitude XPi Advanced Port Replicator User’s
Guide.
REPLICATOR SCSI
2-10
you determine if the computer
exits suspend mode when an installed modem card
receives an incoming call.
(the default) is used to resume normal
operation when the computer detects a modem ring.
keeps the computer in suspend mode
when the computer detects a modem ring.
NOTES: Dell recommends that you set RING/EVENT
RESUME to DISABLED when an external serial device other
than a modem is connected to your computer.
In order for the RING/EVENT RESUME option to work properly,
this feature must be enabled in the device driver for your modem
PC Card. All drivers supplied by Dell with your computer are
configured to allow the computer to resume normal operation
when a modem receives an incoming call. If you use a PC Card
that you did not receive from Dell, check the documentation to
make sure this feature is enabled.
A change to the RING/EVENT RESUME option takes effect
immediately (rebooting is not required).
Ring Speed
lets you configure the default ring speed of
the Dell Token Ring Advanced Port Replicator. The settings are 16 MBPS and 4 MBPS.
RING SPEED
NOTE: This option appears only if the computer is connected to a Dell Token Ring Advanced Port Replicator.
S2D Time-Out
lets you determine how long your computer remains idle (no I/O activity) before activating
suspend-to-disk mode to conserve battery power.
S2D TIME-OUT
Settings for this option in both AC and BATTERY are:
•
•
•
•
•
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
DISABLED
30 MINUTES
1 HOUR
2 HOURS
3 HOURS
•
•
•
•
4 HOURS
6 HOURS
8 HOURS (the
12 HOURS
default)
A change to the S2D TIME-OUT option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required).
Settings for this option are:
•
ENABLED
If you are not in the System Setup program, you can activate suspend-to-disk mode at any time by pressing
<FN><A>. Press the power switch to resume from suspend-todisk mode.
•
DISABLED
Serial Port
To increase battery operating time, set the SMART CPU
MODE option to ENABLED.
allows you to map the address of the serial
port or to disable the serial port.
When the SMART CPU MODE option is enabled and the microprocessor is inactive, the computer slows the microprocessor to
save power.
SERIAL PORT
Settings for this option are:
•
•
•
•
•
COM1
(the default) maps the serial port to COM1.
COM2
maps the serial port to COM2.
COM3
maps the serial port to COM3
COM4
maps the serial port to COM4.
disables the serial port and its assigned
COM address freeing its interrupt for another serial
device to use.
DISABLE
For a change in the SERIAL PORT option to take effect, you
must reboot your computer.
Service Tag
displays the computer’s five-character service code, which was programmed into NVRAM by Dell
during the manufacturing process. Be prepared to supply
this identification during technical assistance or service
calls. The service tag is also accessed by certain Dell support software, including diagnostics.
SERVICE TAG
There are no user-selectable settings for this option.
NOTE: Convert the service tag number into an express
service code when prompted to do so the first time you
turn on the computer (or use the program in the Dell
Accessories folder or program group). Keep the code
handy in case you call Dell for technical assistance. The
code helps Dell’s automated support telephone system
direct your call more efficiently.
Smart CPU Mode
(the default) allows the computer to slow
down the microprocessor when it is inactive.
keeps the microprocessor running at its
normal operating speed regardless of microprocessor
inactivity.
NOTES: Some communications software may not work
properly when SMART CPU MODE is enabled. Dell
recommends that you set SMART CPU MODE to DISABLED if
you are using communications software.
Interactive application programs should function well
when SMART CPU MODE is enabled. (Examples of interactive
programs include spreadsheet, text editor, graphics design,
entertainment, educational, and utility programs.) However, you
may experience performance degradation when recalculating a
large spreadsheet or during an extensive screen redraw in a
graphical program. Benchmark utilities may not perform as
intended when doing microprocessor speed tests. If the software
you use suffers significant performance degradation, set SMART
CPU MODE to DISABLED.
A change to the SMART CPU MODE option takes effect
immediately (rebooting is not required).
Speaker Volume
SPEAKER VOLUME allows
you to disable or adjust the
volume of the computer’s built-in speakers or attached
external speakers.The settings for this option are HIGH
(the default), MEDIUM, LOW, and DISABLED. To preview a
volume setting, press the right- or left-arrow key several
times while this option is highlighted and listen to the beep.
NOTE: Warning sounds, such as low-battery beeps, will
sound even if SPEAKER VOLUME is set to DISABLED.
A change to the SPEAKER VOLUME option takes effect
immediately (rebooting is not required).
SMART CPU MODE allows
the computer to slow down the
microprocessor automatically if it is not being actively
used.
Customizing System Features
2-11
If you are not in the System Setup program, you can
change speaker volume settings at any time with the following key combinations:
•
<FN><F4> toggles system sounds on and off. System
sounds include keyboard clicks and beep codes.
NOTE: Warnings sounds, such as low-battery beeps,
will sound even if this key combination is used to disable other system sound.
•
<FN><PAGE UP> increases the volume from audio
applications.
•
<FN><PAGE DOWN> decreases the volume from
audio applications.
•
<FN><END> mutes the sound of audio applications.
The amount of memory displayed includes the standard
16 megabytes (MB) of system memory (permanently
installed on the system board), plus any memory modules
installed in your computer.
There are no user-selectable settings for this option. The
amount of memory displayed changes if you install or
remove a memory module.
Possible settings for this option are:
•
•
•
•
16 MB
20 MB
24 MB
28 MB
•
•
•
•
32 MB
36 MB
40 MB
48 MB
Suspend Time-Out
System Switch
SUSPEND TIME-OUT
lets you determine how long your
computer remains idle before activating suspend mode to
conserve battery power.
SYSTEM SWITCH
Settings for this option in both AC and BATTERY are:
If you want the power switch to turn the computer on and
off, set this option to ON/OFF (the default). If you want to
use the power switch to activate and resume from suspendto-disk mode, set this option to S2D/RFD.
•
•
•
•
•
DISABLED
1 MINUTE
2 MINUTES
3 MINUTES
4 MINUTES
•
•
•
•
•
5 MINUTES
10 MINUTES
(the default)
15 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
1 HOUR
To increase battery operating time, set the SUSPEND
TIME-OUT option to a lower number of minutes.
NOTE: Set the SUSPEND TIME-OUT option to DISABLED if
using it causes compatibility problems with your software.
allows you to use the power switch
as a regular power switch or to enable and resume from
suspend-to-disk mode.
NOTE: If the computer is in suspend-to-disk mode, pressing the power switch always causes the computer to resume
normal operation.
When this option is set to S2D/RFD, slide the power switch
forward to activate suspend-to-disk mode. If the computer is
already in suspend-to-disk mode, slide the switch forward to
resume normal operation.
A change to the SUSPEND TIME-OUT option takes effect
immediately (rebooting is not required).
If the SYSTEM SWITCH option is set to S2D/RFD and the
computer is not in suspend-to-disk mode (that is, if there is
no data in the S2D partition), pressing the power switch starts
the computer normally.
If you are not in the System Setup program, you can activate suspend mode at any time by pressing <FN><ESC>.
The computer resumes normal operation automatically when
you press a key on the built-in keyboard.
Time
System Memory
SYSTEM MEMORY displays
the total amount of dynamic
random-access memory (DRAM) installed in your
computer.
2-12
TIME resets
the time on the computer’s internal clock.
Time is kept in a 24-hour format (hours:minutes:
seconds).
NOTE: If a network server controls the time reflected by
the TIME option, changing this option has no effect.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
A change to the TIME option becomes effective immediately
(rebooting is not required). However, you must reboot to
make the change apparent to the operating system.
Video Memory
In all other operating systems, use the PC Card
configuration utility that comes with the operating
system.
•
In Windows 95, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. Double-click the
Display icon, and click the Settings tab.
VIDEO MEMORY displays
the amount of video memory
installed on the system board. There are no userselectable settings for this option.
In Windows 3.x, double-click this icon in
the Control Panel in the Main group. For
more information about this utility, see the
topic titled “Video Drivers and Video Resolution” in the online System User’s Guide. The
utility contains help files.
System Utilities and Drivers
System utilities and drivers allow you to control certain
hardware and software features of your computer. If Dell
installed your operating system, the system utilities and
drivers are on the hard-disk drive that came with the
computer.
In all other operating systems, use the video resolution utility that comes with the operating system.
•
In Windows 3.x, double-click the Control
Panel icon in the Main program group.
Then double-click the icon shown at the
left. For more information about this utility, see the topic titled “Customizing Trackball and
Cursor Features” in the online System User’s Guide.
The utility contains help files.
If you are using Windows 95, Windows 3.x,
Windows NT, or Windows for Workgroups,
use the Dell DiskMaker to make program diskette sets of installed software, including system utilities.
Look for the Dell DiskMaker icon in the Dell Accessories folder or group.
Use system utilities to:
•
Configure PC Cards
In Windows 3.x, click the PC Card Manager icon in the Phoenix Card Manager
program group. For more information
about this utility, see the topic titled
“Configuring PC Cards” in the online System User’s
Guide. The utility contains help files.
In MS-DOS, use the PCM configuration utility on
the hard-disk drive. For more information, see the
subsection titled “Configuring PC Cards” found later
in this section.
Customize trackball/mouse and cursor features
In Windows 95, click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. Then doubleclick this icon.
Dell highly recommends that you create program diskette
sets of your installed software, including system utilities
and drivers. If your hard-disk drive becomes corrupted,
you can use the program diskettes to reinstall the utilities.
NOTE: If you received the utilities and drivers separately, or if Dell installed MS-DOS only on your harddisk drive, install the utilities according to the instructions that accompanied the diskette kit. Then store the
diskettes in a safe place.
Change video resolution
In all other operating systems, check the operating
system documentation that accompanied the computer for information on configuring the pointing
device.
•
Check battery status
This minimized icon, which appears at the
bottom of the display, displays the percentage of battery charge remaining and tells
you approximately how much longer the
battery will run. Click the icon to access the help
files for more information, including instructions on
moving the icon to a more convenient location on the
display. For more information about this utility, see
the topic titled “Battery Status Icon” in the online
System User’s Guide.
In MS-DOS, press <FN><F3> to display a battery
gauge that shows the approximate percentage of
charge remaining in your battery.
Customizing System Features
2-13
•
•
Manage the suspend-to-disk partition on the harddisk drive
To delete the asset tag code without assigning a new one,
type asset /d and press <ENTER>.
In all operating systems, use the instructions in “Suspend-to-Disk Utility” found later in this section to
delete and recreate the suspend-to-disk partition on
the hard-disk drive. For more information, see “Suspend-to-Disk Mode” in the online System User’s
Guide.
To display a help screen for this utility, type asset /?
and press <ENTER>.
Assign an asset tag code for your computer
In all operating systems, see “Asset Tag Utility”
found later in this section to assign this code.
Asset Tag Utility
The Asset Tag utility (asset.com) allows you or your organization to assign an asset tag code for your computer
without attaching an adhesive label to the computer. You can
then view the code on the display.
Use the information in the following subsection to assign,
change, or delete an asset tag code. You can view the
code on the System Setup screens.
If the path statement in your autoexec.bat file does not
already contain the directory in which you installed the Asset
Tag utility, modify the path statement to include that directory. (See your MS-DOS reference documentation for
information on modifying the autoexec.bat file.)
Assigning, Changing, and Deleting an
Asset Tag Code
An asset tag code can have up to ten characters; any combination of characters excluding spaces is valid.
To assign or change an asset tag code, type asset at the
operating system prompt. Then type a space, the new code,
and press <ENTER>. For example, if the asset tag code is
1234567890, type the following and press <ENTER>:
asset 1234567890
When asked... Are you sure? [y,n], type y and
press <ENTER>.
The computer then displays the new or modified asset tag
code as well as the service tag code Dell assigned to your
computer.
To view an existing asset tag code, type asset and press
<ENTER>.
2-14
Configuring PC Cards
In MS-DOS, you can configure installed PC Cards and
install their device drivers using the PCM configuration
utility.
NOTE: You do not have to run the PCM utility every time
you insert or remove a PC Card. Run the utility only when
you want to change how a card is configured.
Use the utility to perform the following tasks:
•
Remap the hardware configuration of a port on a
card.
•
Configure the computer to load device drivers into
memory each time you boot the computer.
•
Reconfigure the computer to load device drivers for
new or additional PC Cards.
•
Increase the amount of available MS-DOS conventional memory by reconfiguring the computer to not
load specified device drivers.
To start the utility, type cd c:\pcm at the MS-DOS
prompt and press <ENTER>. Follow the instructions on
the screen to perform the necessary configuration tasks
for your PC Cards.
Suspend-to-Disk Utility
If Dell installed the operating system on your hard-disk
drive, the Suspend-to-Disk utility was used to create a
hard-disk drive partition—the S2D partition—that
matches the size of your memory configuration. This partition stores all the system data that is copied and saved
when you activate suspend-to-disk mode.
The S2D partition consists of a small physical partition
on your hard-disk drive and a portion of your MS-DOS
file system.
The Suspend-to-Disk utility allows you to manage the
S2D partition in your file system as your computing
needs change. Use the instructions in this subsection to
remove the S2D partition if you need the space for other
purposes and to recreate the partition when necessary.
Depending on the amount of system memory installed in
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
your computer, the hard-disk drive space used can be 10
to 42 MB in size.
The Suspend-to-Disk utility consists of the following
files:
•
The rms2d.exe file removes the S2D partition so that
you can use that portion of the hard-disk drive for other
files.
•
The mks2d.exe file creates an S2D partition on the
hard-disk drive so that you can put your computer in
suspend-to-disk mode.
•
The readme.s2d file contains instructions for creating
and removing the S2D partition and updates information
about the Suspend-to-Disk utility.
If Dell did not install MS-DOS on your computer or if
you deleted the Dell-installed Suspend-to-Disk utility,
you must create an S2D partition on your hard-disk drive
before you can activate suspend-to-disk mode. For
instructions, see “Creating the S2D Partition” found later
in this subsection.
Removing the S2D Partition
If you want to use the S2D partition on your hard-disk
drive for another purpose (for instance, if you are running
out of file space), use the following procedure to remove
the partition:
1.
At an MS-DOS prompt, type cd c:\dell\util
and press <ENTER> to change to the directory on
your hard-disk drive that contains the Suspend-toDisk utility files.
If you are using an operating system that is not compatible with MS-DOS, see the readme.s2d file for
instructions.
2.
Type rms2d and press <ENTER>.
Status messages appear on the display as the removal
process progresses. When the S2D partition has been
removed, the following message appears:
NOTE: After you remove the S2D partition, the computer
cannot activate suspend-to-disk mode until you recreate
the partition. If you try to activate suspend-to-disk mode
and receive the message “No Suspend-To-Disk
partition available,” you must create an S2D partition. (See the next subsection, “Creating the S2D
Partition.”)
Creating the S2D Partition
The mks2d.exe file creates the S2D partition the computer
uses to store the system data that is saved when you put the
computer in suspend-to-disk mode. Use the mks2d.exe file
to create a new S2D partition in the following cases:
•
If Dell did not install MS-DOS on your hard-disk
drive
•
If you increase the amount of system memory by
adding a memory module
•
If you used the rms2d.exe file to remove the original
S2D partition and now want to recreate the partition
•
•
If your hard-disk drive becomes corrupted
If you install a new hard-disk drive
If you received the system utilities separately on diskette
or if you deleted the Suspend-to-Disk utility from your
hard-disk drive, use the instructions in “Installing a Utility From a Diskette” found earlier in this section to install
the utility.
Use the following procedure to create an S2D partition.
NOTE: If you are creating the partition on a new harddisk drive, if Dell did not install MS-DOS on your harddisk drive, or if you are using an operating system that is
not compatible with MS-DOS, read the readme.s2d file
before you use the following procedure.
1.
At an MS-DOS prompt, type cd
c:\dell\util and press <ENTER> to change to
the directory on your hard-disk drive that contains
the Suspend-to-Disk utility files.
The S2D partition was successfully
removed.
Customizing System Features
2-15
2.
Type mks2d and press <ENTER>.
As the utility builds the partition, status messages
appear on the display. If an error message appears, it
provides information about steps to take to continue
building the partition.
2-16
When the S2D partition has been built and verified,
the following message appears:
The S2D partition was successfully
created.
For more information on when and how to use suspendto-disk mode, see “Suspend-to-Disk Mode” in the online
System User’s Guide.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting Your Computer
Ichapter
f your Dell computer is not working as expected, this
provides both initial checks for solving basic
computer problems and detailed troubleshooting procedures. It lists system messages and beep codes, their
possible causes, and actions you can take to resolve any
problems indicated by a message or code. This chapter
also offers some general guidelines for analyzing software problems.
Yes. A connection to your computer was loose. You
have fixed the problem.
No. Continue to step 3.
3.
Perform the steps in “Look and Listen” found
later in this chapter.
Did your computer complete the start-up (boot)
routine?
NOTE: When you see the question “Is the problem
resolved?” in a troubleshooting procedure, repeat the
operation that caused the problem to see if the problem
still occurs.
NOTE: The boot routine is the operating system’s
attempt to load its files into memory from the bootup sector on the hard-disk drive or bootable diskette.
Yes. Continue to step 4.
Backing Up Your Files
No. Call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.)
4.
You can lose data when a computer failure occurs. If your
computer is behaving erratically, back up your files
immediately. See your operating system documentation
for instructions on backing up files.
A single beep always sounds during the boot routine
when the built-in sound ports or attached external
speakers are tested, unless the SPEAKER VOLUME
option in the System Setup program is set to OFF. Any
system beep codes sound at high volume, even if the
SPEAKER VOLUME option is set to OFF.
Basic Checks
Yes. Go to “Messages and Codes” found later in this
chapter.
The following procedure leads you through the checks
necessary to solve some basic computer problems:
1.
Is your computer wet or damaged?
No. Continue to step 5.
5.
Yes. Go to “Troubleshooting a Wet Computer” or
“Troubleshooting a Damaged Computer” found later
in this chapter.
2.
Did you receive a system message or beep code?
Verify, and correct if necessary, the system setup
settings as explained in Chapter 2, “Customizing
System Features.”
Is the problem resolved?
No. Continue to step 2.
Yes. The system configuration information was
incorrect. You have fixed the problem.
Perform the steps in the next subsection, “Checking Connections.”
No. Continue to step 6.
Is the problem resolved?
6.
Run the Dell diagnostics. (See Chapter 4, “Running
the Dell Diagnostics.”)
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-1
•
Checking Connections
The battery
Loose or improperly connected cables are likely sources
of problems for your computer, external monitor, or other
peripherals (such as a printer, external keyboard, or
mouse). A quick check of all cable connections can easily
solve these problems. If a connector has two small
screws, make sure the screws are tight. In addition, check
for damaged or frayed cables.
battery
Be sure the following items are properly connected or
installed:
•
The AC adapter and power cable
NOTE: The AC adapter connector, the AC adapter,
and the AC adapter cable may appear slightly different from those shown in Figure 3-1.
AC adapter
AC power cable (to
AC power source)
Figure 3-2. Removing the Battery
•
All cables to external devices
parallel connector
AC adapter
cable
Figure 3-1. AC Adapter and Power Cable
monitor connector
PS/2 connector
serial connector
Figure 3-3. External Cables
3-2
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Look and Listen
listening to the computer does not resolve the problem,
see the next subsection, “System Setup Options.”
Looking at and listening to your computer is important in
determining the source of a problem. Look and listen for
the indications described in Table 3-1. If looking and
Table 3-1. Boot Routine Indications
Look for:
Action
An error message
See “Messages and Codes” found later in this chapter.
The power indicator
If the computer’s power indicator does not come on, see “Troubleshooting a Power Failure”
found later in this chapter.
The keyboard
indicators
The built-in keyboard has three indicators, the <NUM LOCK> key, the <CAPS LOCK> key, and the
<SCROLL LOCK> key. Press each of these keys to toggle the keyboard indicators on and off. If the
keyboard indicators do not light up, run the Keyboard Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (For
instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”)
The diskette-drive
access indicator
The diskette-drive access indicator should flicker when you access data on the diskette drive.
You can test this indicator by inserting a diskette into the drive, typing dir a: at an MS-DOS
prompt, and pressing <ENTER>. If the diskette-drive access indicator does not light up, see
“Troubleshooting the Diskette Drive” found later in this chapter.
The hard-disk drive/
CD-ROM drive
access indicator
The hard-disk drive/CD-ROM drive access indicator should flicker when you access data on
the hard-disk drive or CD-ROM drive. You can test this indicator by typing dir c: at an
MS-DOS prompt and pressing <ENTER>. If the hard-disk drive/CD-ROM drive access indicator
does not light up, see “Troubleshooting the Hard-Disk Drive” found later in this chapter.
A series of beeps
See “Messages and Codes” found later in this chapter.
An unfamiliar constant scraping or
grinding sound when
you access a drive
Make sure the sound is not caused by the application program you are running. The sound
could be caused by a hardware malfunction. See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions
on obtaining technical assistance from Dell.
The absence of a
familiar sound
When you turn on your computer, you can hear the hard-disk drive spin up and the computer
trying to access the boot files from the hard-disk drive or the diskette drive. If your computer
does not boot, call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.) Otherwise, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-3
System Setup Options
You can easily correct certain system problems by verifying the settings for system setup options. When you boot
your computer, it compares the system configuration
information with the current hardware configuration. If
your computer’s hardware configuration doesn’t match
the information recorded by the system setup options, an
error message may appear on your display.
To fix this problem, correct the appropriate system setup
options and reboot your computer. See Chapter 2, “Customizing System Features,” for detailed information.
If, after checking the system setup options, you have not
resolved the problem, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell
Diagnostics.”
3-4
Messages and Codes
Your application programs, operating system, and the
computer itself are capable of identifying problems and
alerting you to them. When this occurs, a message may
appear on the computer’s display or on an external monitor (if one is attached), or a beep code may sound.
If an error message appears on the display or external
monitor, make a note of the message. See Table 3-2 for
an explanation of the message and suggestions for correcting any errors. The messages are listed alphabetically.
NOTE: If the message is not listed in Table 3-2, check the
documentation for the application program that was running at the time the message appeared and/or the
operating system documentation for an explanation of
the message and a recommended action.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 3-2. System Error Messages
Message
Cause
Action
Auxiliary
device failure
The integrated trackball or
external PS/2 mouse may be
faulty.
If you are using an external mouse only, check the connection for a loose or improperly connected cable. (See
“Checking Connections” found earlier in this chapter.)
If the problem persists, enable the INTEGRATED TRACKBALL system setup option. (For instructions, see “Integrated Trackball” in Chapter 2, or the topic titled “Dell
Control Center” in your online System User’s Guide.)
If the problem persists, call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.)
Bad command or
file name
The command you entered does
not exist or is not in the pathname you specified.
Make sure you have spelled the command correctly,
placed spaces in the proper location, and used the correct pathname.
Cache disabled
due to failure
The primary cache internal to
the microprocessor has failed.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see
Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
Data error
The diskette or hard-disk drive
cannot read the data.
Run the MS-DOS chkdsk utility to check the file structure of the diskette or hard-disk drive. See the MS-DOS
documentation for more information.
For other operating systems, run the appropriate utility
to check the file structure of the diskette or hard-disk
drive. See the documentation that came with your operating system.
Decreasing
available
memory
One or more memory modules
may be faulty or improperly
seated.
See “Troubleshooting Memory” found later in this
chapter.
Disk C: failed
initialization
The hard-disk drive failed initialization.
See “Troubleshooting the Hard-Disk Drive” found
later in this chapter.
Diskette drive
0 seek failure
A cable may be loose or the
system configuration information may not match the hardware configuration.
See “Troubleshooting the Diskette Drive” found later
in this chapter.
Diskette read
failure
A cable may be loose, or the
diskette may be faulty.
If the diskette-drive access indicator lights up, try a
different diskette. If the problem persists, see “Troubleshooting the Diskette Drive” found later in this chapter.
Diskette subsystem reset
failed
The diskette drive controller
may be faulty.
Run the Diskette Drive Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell
Diagnostics.”)
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-5
Table 3-2. System Error Messages (Continued)
Message
Cause
Action
Diskette writeprotected
Because the diskette is writeprotected, the operation cannot
be completed.
Slide the write-protect notch up.
Drive not ready
No diskette is in the diskette
drive, or no hard-disk drive is
in the drive bay. The operation
requires a diskette in the drive
or a hard-disk drive in the bay
before it can continue.
Put a diskette in the drive, or push the diskette all the
way into the drive until the eject button pops out. Or,
install a hard-disk drive in the drive bay.
Error reading
PCMCIA card
The computer cannot identify
the PC Card.
Reseat the card or try another PC Card that you know
works. If the problem persists, see “Troubleshooting a
PC Card” found later in this chapter.
Extended memory size has
changed
The amount of memory
recorded in NVRAM does not
match the memory installed in
the computer.
Reboot the computer. If the error appears on the display again, call Dell for technical assistance. (See
Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.)
Gate A20
failure
An installed memory module
may be loose.
See “Troubleshooting Memory” found later in this
chapter.
General failure
The operating system is unable
to carry out the command.
This message is usually followed by specific information—for example, PRINTER OUT OF PAPER.
Respond by taking the appropriate action.
Hard-disk
drive configuration error
The computer cannot identify
the drive type.
Turn off the computer, remove the drive, and boot the
computer from a bootable diskette. Then turn off the
computer, reinstall the drive, and reboot the computer.
Run the Hard-Disk Drive Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell
Diagnostics.”)
Hard-disk
drive controller failure 0
The hard-disk drive does not
respond to commands from the
computer.
Turn off the computer, remove the drive, and boot the
computer from a bootable diskette. Then turn off the
computer again, reinstall the drive, and reboot the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Then run
the Hard-Disk Drive Test Group in the Dell diagnostics.
(For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”)
Hard-disk
drive controller
failure 1
The CD-ROM drive does not
respond to commands from the
computer.
See “Troubleshooting the CD-ROM Drive” found later
in this chapter.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
3-6
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 3-2. System Error Messages (Continued)
Message
Cause
Action
Hard-disk
drive failure
The hard-disk drive does not
respond to commands from the
computer.
Turn off the computer, remove the drive, and boot the
computer from a bootable diskette. Then turn off the
computer again, reinstall the drive, and reboot the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Then run
the Hard-Disk Drive Test Group in the Dell diagnostics.
(For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”)
Hard-disk
drive read
failure
The hard-disk drive may be
faulty.
See “Troubleshooting the Hard-Disk Drive” found
later in this chapter.
Invalid configuration
information–
please run System Setup
program
The system configuration
information does not match the
hardware configuration. This
message is most likely to occur
after a memory module is
installed.
Correct the appropriate options in the System Setup
program. (For instructions, see “Using the System
Setup Program” in Chapter 2.)
Keyboard clock
line failure
A cable or connector may be
loose, or the keyboard may be
faulty.
Run the Keyboard Controller Test in the Dell diagnostics. (For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell
Diagnostics.”)
Keyboard controller failure
A cable or connector may be
loose, or the keyboard may be
faulty.
Reboot the computer and do not touch the keyboard or
the mouse during the boot routine. If the problem persists, Run the Keyboard Controller Test in the Dell
diagnostics. (For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the
Dell Diagnostics.”)
Keyboard data
line failure
A cable or connector may be
loose, or the keyboard may be
faulty.
Run the Keyboard Controller Test in the Dell diagnostics. (For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell
Diagnostics.”)
Keyboard stuck
key failure
If using an external keyboard or
keypad, a cable or connector
may be loose or the keyboard
may be faulty.
If using the built-in keyboard,
the keyboard may be faulty.
A key on the built-in keyboard
or external keyboard may have
been pressed while the computer was booting.
Run the Stuck Key Test in the Dell diagnostics.
(For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell
Diagnostics.”)
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-7
Table 3-2. System Error Messages (Continued)
Message
Cause
Action
Memory address
line failure
at address,
read value
expecting value
An installed memory module
may be faulty or improperly
seated.
See “Troubleshooting Memory” found later in this
chapter.
Memory allocation
error
The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the
operating system, another
application program, or a utility.
Turn off the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then
restart it. Try to run the program again. If the problem
persists, contact the software company.
Memory data
line failure
at address,
read value
expecting value
An installed memory module
may be faulty or improperly
seated.
See “Troubleshooting Memory” found later in this
chapter.
Memory double
word logic
failure at
address, read
value expecting value
An installed memory module
may be faulty or improperly
seated.
See “Troubleshooting Memory” found later in this
chapter.
Memory odd/
even logic
failure at
address, read
value expecting value
An installed memory module
may be faulty or improperly
seated.
See “Troubleshooting Memory” found later in this
chapter.
Memory write/
read failure
at address,
read value
expecting value
An installed memory module
may be faulty or improperly
seated.
See “Troubleshooting Memory” found later in this
chapter.
No boot device
available
The computer cannot find the
diskette or hard-disk drive.
If the diskette drive is your boot device, make sure
there is a bootable diskette in the drive. If the hard-disk
drive is your boot device, make sure the drive is
installed, properly seated, and partitioned as a boot
device.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
3-8
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 3-2. System Error Messages (Continued)
Message
Cause
Action
No boot sector
on hard-disk
drive
The operating system may be
corrupted.
Reinstall your operating system. See the documentation that came with your operating system.
No timer tick
interrupt
A chip on the system board
may be malfunctioning.
Run the System Set Test Group in the Dell diagnostics.
(For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell
Diagnostics.”)
Non-system
disk or disk
error
The diskette in drive A or your
hard-disk drive does not have a
bootable operating system
installed on it.
If you are trying to boot from the diskette, replace it
with one that has a bootable operating system. If you
are trying to boot from the hard-disk drive, see “Troubleshooting the Hard-Disk Drive” found later in this
chapter.
Not a boot
diskette
There is no operating system on
the diskette.
Boot the computer with a diskette that contains an
operating system.
Optional ROM
bad checksum
The optional ROM
apparently failed.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see
Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
Sector not
found
MS-DOS is unable to locate a
sector on the diskette or harddisk drive. You probably have a
bad sector or corrupted FAT on the
diskette or hard-disk drive.
Check the diskette or hard-disk drive with the MSDOS chkdsk utility. If a large number of sectors are defective, back up the data (if possible), and then reformat the diskette or hard-disk drive.
Seek error
MS-DOS is unable to find a
specific track on the diskette or
hard-disk drive.
If the error is on the diskette drive, try another diskette
in the drive. If the error persists, see “Troubleshooting
the Diskette Drive” found later in this chapter. If the
error is on the hard-disk drive, see “Troubleshooting
the Hard-Disk Drive” found later in this chapter.
Shutdown
failure
A chip on the system board
may be malfunctioning.
Run the System Set Test Group in the Dell diagnostics.
(For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell
Diagnostics.”)
Time-of-day
clock lost
power
Data stored in NVRAM has
become corrupted.
Connect your computer to AC power to charge the battery. If the problem persists, try to restore the data. To
restore the data, press <FN><F1> to enter the System
Setup program and then immediately exit it (as described in
“Using the System Setup Program” in Chapter 2). If the
message reappears, call Dell for technical assistance. (For
instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-9
Table 3-2. System Error Messages (Continued)
Message
Cause
Action
Time-of-day
clock stopped
The reserve battery that supports the data stored in
NVRAM may be dead.
Connect your computer to AC power to charge the battery. If the problem persists, call Dell for technical
assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting
Help.”)
Time-of-day
not set—please
run the System
Setup program
The time or date stored in the
System Setup program does not
match the system clock.
Correct the settings for the DATE and TIME options. (For
instructions, see “Using the System Setup Program” in
Chapter 2.)
Timer chip
counter 2
failed
A chip on the system board
may be malfunctioning.
Run the System Set Test Group in the Dell diagnostics.
(For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell
Diagnostics.”)
Unexpected
interrupt in
protected mode
The keyboard controller may be
malfunctioning, or an installed
memory module may be loose.
Run the RAM Test Group and the Keyboard Controller
Test in the Dell diagnostics. (For instructions, see Chapter
4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”)
Warning! Battery is
critically low.
The battery is running out of
charge.
Replace the battery, or connect the computer to AC
power. Otherwise, activate suspend-to-disk mode or
turn off the computer. (For more information, see the
topic titled “Final Low-Battery Warning” in the online
System User’s Guide.)
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
System Beep Codes
When errors that occur during the boot routine cannot be
reported on the built-in display or on an external monitor
(if attached), the computer may emit a series of beeps that
identify the problem. The beep code is a pattern of sounds:
for example, one beep, followed by a second beep, and
then a burst of three beeps (code 1-1-3) means that the
computer was unable to read the data in nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). This information is
important to the Dell support staff if you need to call for
technical assistance.
3-10
When a beep code is emitted, write it down on a copy of
the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5, and then
look it up in Table 3-3. If you are unable to resolve the
problem by looking up the meaning of the beep code, use
the Dell diagnostics to identify a more serious cause. (See
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”) If you are still
unable to resolve the problem, call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.)
Table 3-3 lists the beep codes and possible corrective
actions.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 3-3. Beep Codes
Message
Cause
Action
1-1-3
NVRAM write/read failure.
Run the System Set Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (See
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.) If the
program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. (For
instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
1-1-4
ROM BIOS checksum failure.
Run the System Set Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (See
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.) If the
program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. (For
instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
1-2-1
Programmable interval timer
failure.
Run the System Set Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (See
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.) If the
program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. (For
instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
1-2-2
DMA initialization failure.
Run the System Set Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (See
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.) If the
program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. (For
instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
1-2-3
DMA page register write/read
failure.
Run the System Set Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (See
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.) If the
program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. (For
instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
1-3-1
through
2-4-4
An installed memory module is
not being properly identified or
used.
See “Troubleshooting Memory” found later in this chapter.
3-1-1
Slave DMA register failure.
Run the System Set Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (See
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.) If the
program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. (For
instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
3-1-2
Master DMA register failure.
Run the System Set Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (See
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.) If the
program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. (For
instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
3-1-3
Master interrupt mask register
failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
3-1-4
Slave interrupt mask register
failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-11
Table 3-3. Beep Codes
Message
Cause
Action
3-2-4
Keyboard controller test failure.
Run the Keyboard Controller Test in the Dell diagnostics. (For
instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”)
3-3-4
Display memory test failure.
Run the Video Memory Test in the Dell diagnostics. (For
instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”)
3-4-1
Display initialization failure.
Run the Video Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”)
3-4-2
Display retrace test failure.
Run the Video Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”)
4-2-1
No timer tick.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
4-2-2
Shutdown failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
4-2-3
Gate A20 failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
4-2-4
Unexpected interrupt in protected
mode.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
4-3-1
Memory failure above address
0FFFFh.
Run the RAM Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”)
4-3-3
Timer chip counter 2 failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
4-3-4
Time-of-day clock stopped.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
4-4-1
Serial port failure.
Run the Serial/Infrared Port Test Group in the Dell diagnostics.
(For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”)
4-4-2
Parallel port failure.
Run the Parallel Port Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (For
instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”)
4-4-3
Math coprocessor failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
5-1-1
System power-management interrupt initialization failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
5-1-2
BIOS shadowing failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
3-12
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 3-3. Beep Codes
Message
Cause
Action
5-1-3
Video BIOS shadowing failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
5-2-1
Keyboard controller download
failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
5-2-2
CPU stepping failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
5-2-3
System board failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
5-2-4
Setup decompression and shadowing failure.
Call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
Finding Software Solutions
Because most computers have several application programs installed in addition to the operating system,
isolating a software problem can be confusing. Software
errors can also appear to be hardware malfunctions at
first. Software problems can result from the following
circumstances:
•
•
•
Improper installation or configuration of a program
•
Memory conflicts resulting from the use of terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) programs, such as
device drivers
•
Interrupt conflicts between devices
Input errors
Device drivers that may conflict with certain application programs
You can confirm that a computer problem is caused by
software by first running the System Set Test Group as
described in Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.” If
all tests in the test group complete successfully, the error condition is most likely caused by software.
The following subsections provide some general guidelines for analyzing software problems. For detailed
troubleshooting information on a particular program, see
the documentation that accompanied the software or consult the support service for the software.
Installing and Configuring Software
When you obtain software, check it for viruses with
virus-scanning software before installing it on your computer’s hard-disk drive. Viruses, which are pieces of code
that can replicate themselves, can quickly use all available system memory, damage and/or destroy data stored
on the hard-disk drive, and permanently affect the performance of the programs they infect. Several commercial
virus-scanning programs are available for purchase, and
most bulletin board services (BBSs) archive freely distributed virus-scanning programs that you can download
with a modem.
Before installing a program, read its documentation to
learn how the program works, what hardware it requires,
and what its defaults are. A program usually includes
installation instructions in its accompanying documentation and a software installation routine on its program
diskettes.
The software installation routine assists you in transferring the appropriate program files to your computer’s
hard-disk drive. Installation instructions may provide
details about how to configure your operating system to
successfully run the program. Always read the installa-
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-13
tion instructions before running a program’s installation
routine. You may be instructed to modify the initialization or startup files of your operating system.
When you run the installation routine, be prepared to
respond to prompts for information about how your computer’s operating system is configured, what type of
computer you have, and what peripherals are connected
to your computer.
Initialization or Startup Files
Whenever you start or reboot your computer, your operating system executes commands it finds in its
initialization or startup files.
These files contain commands that automatically configure the operating environment by setting system
parameters, starting memory-resident programs, and
loading device driver software. If you experience program conflicts or memory error messages, check the
commands for memory-resident programs in the initialization or startup files of your operating system. If a
program or peripheral does not work correctly, check the
product’s documentation to see if you need to modify
these files.
programs that require more memory than is available in
the conventional memory area:
•
The application program is written for use with
expanded memory.
•
The EMM driver is installed and properly initialized.
Improper use of an EMM can lead to conflicts between
the expanded-memory operation and any installed PC
Cards, which may be assigned memory areas that overlap
memory areas that the EMM is using.
Using Software
The following subsections discuss errors that can occur
while using your software.
Error Messages
Error messages can be produced by an application program, the operating system, or the computer. “Messages
and Codes,” found earlier in this chapter, discusses the
error messages that are generated by the computer. If you
receive an error message that is not listed in that section,
check your operating system or application program
documentation.
Expanded and Extended Memory
Input Errors
If you operate your computer with MS-DOS, the operating system makes only 640 kilobytes (KB) (called
conventional memory) of the first 1 megabyte (MB) of system
memory available for use by application programs. Some
programs require more than 640 KB of memory and, therefore, cannot be run with conventional memory alone. Other
programs run much faster when they have more than 1 MB of
memory to use.
If a specific key or set of keys is pressed at the wrong
time, a program may give you unexpected results. See the
documentation that came with your application program to
make sure the values or characters you are entering are valid.
When you boot your computer, MS-DOS recognizes
memory in excess of 1 MB as extended memory. Some, but
not all, application programs require the use of extended
memory.
Other MS-DOS application programs are able to use
extended memory only if it is first converted into
expanded memory by an expanded memory manager (EMM).
Under the following conditions, expanded memory can
greatly enhance the computer’s ability to use application
3-14
Make sure the operating environment is set up to accommodate the programs you use. Keep in mind that
whenever you change the parameters of the computer’s
operating environment, you may affect the successful
operation of your programs. Occasionally, when you
modify the operating environment, you may need to reinstall a program that no longer runs properly.
Memory-Resident Programs
There are a variety of utilities and supplementary programs that can be loaded either when the computer boots
or from an operating system prompt. These programs are
designed to stay resident in system memory and thus
always be available for use. Because they remain in the
computer’s memory, memory conflicts and errors can
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
result when other programs require use of all or part of
the memory already occupied by these TSR programs.
Table 3-4. IRQ Line Assignments
IRQ Line
Used/Available
IRQ0
Generated by the system timer
IRQ1
Generated by the keyboard controller
to signal that the keyboard output
buffer is full
IRQ2
Generated internally by the interrupt
controller to enable IRQ8 through
IRQ15
Program Conflicts
IRQ3
Some programs may leave portions of their setup information behind, even though you have exited from them.
As a result, other programs cannot run. Rebooting your
computer can confirm whether or not these programs are
the cause of the problem.
Available for use by a PC Card unless
the built-in serial port or infrared port
is configured for COM2
IRQ4
Available for use by a PC Card unless
the built-in serial port is configured for
COM1 (the default)
Other programs use specialized subroutines called device
drivers that can cause problems in your computer. For example, a variation in the way the data is sent to an external
monitor may require a special screen driver program that
expects a certain kind of video mode or monitor. In such cases,
you may have to develop an alternative method of running that
particular program—the creation of a boot file made especially
for that program, for example. For help with this situation, call
the support service offered by the manufacturer of the software
you are using.
IRQ5
Available for use by the audio controller
IRQ6
Generated by the diskette drive controller to indicate that the diskette drive
requires the attention of the microprocessor
IRQ7
Available for use by a PC Card or audio
controller if the built-in parallel port is disabled
Avoiding Interrupt Assignment Conflicts
IRQ8
Generated by the system I/O controller’s RTC
IRQ9
Available for use by the PC Card interrupt controller or the audio controller
IRQ10
Available for use by a PC Card or audio
controller unless the Advanced Port Replicator is attached
IRQ11
Available for use by a PC Card unless
the Advanced Port Replicator is
attached
Typically, your operating system’s initialization or start-up
files contain commands to start TSR programs when you
boot your computer. If you suspect that one of these TSR
programs is causing a memory conflict, remove the commands that start them from the start-up file. If the problem
you were experiencing does not recur, one of the TSR
programs probably created the conflict. Add the TSR commands back into the start-up files one at a time until you
identify which TSR program is creating the conflict.
Problems can arise if two devices attempt to use the same
interrupt request (IRQ) line. To avoid this type of conflict, check the documentation for the default IRQ line
setting for each installed device. Then consult Table 3-4
to configure the device for one of the available IRQ lines.
NOTE: Installed devices cannot share the same COM
port address. The default address of your computer’s
serial port is COM1.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used
in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s
Guide.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-15
Table 3-4. IRQ Line Assignments (Continued)
Table 3-5. Conventional Memory Map
IRQ Line
Used/Available
Address Range
Use
IRQ12
Generated by the keyboard controller
to indicate that the output buffer of the
integrated trackball or external PS/2
mouse is full
00000h–003FFh
Interrupt vector table
00400h–004FFh
BIOS data area
00500h–005FFh
MS-DOS and BASIC work area
00600h–0FFFFh
User memory
10000h–1FFFFh
User memory
20000h–2FFFFh
User memory
30000h–3FFFFh
User memory
40000h–4FFFFh
User memory
50000h–5FFFFh
User memory
60000h–6FFFFh
User memory
70000h–7FFFFh
User memory
80000h–8FFFFh
User memory
90000h–9FBFFh
User memory
IRQ13
Not available
IRQ14
Generated by the hard-disk drive to
indicate that the drive requires the
attention of the microprocessor
IRQ15
Reserved for the CD-ROM drive
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used
in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s
Guide.
Memory Allocations
A microprocessor and programs operating under
MS-DOS (real-mode operation) can address only
1 megabyte (MB) (1024 kilobytes [KB]) of system memory. This area is divided into conventional memory
(sometimes called base memory) and upper memory. All system memory above this 1 MB is called extended memory and
cannot be directly addressed by MS-DOS–based programs
without the aid of some special memory-managing software.
Table 3-5 provides a map of the conventional memory area.
When the microprocessor or a program addresses a location
within the conventional memory range, it is physically
addressing a location in main memory, which is the only main
memory it can address under MS-DOS.
3-16
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym
used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System
User’s Guide.
Table 3-6 provides a map of the upper memory area. Some of
these addresses are dedicated to various system devices, such
as the system/video basic input/output system (BIOS). Others
are available for use by expansion cards and/or an expanded
memory manager (EMM). When the microprocessor or a program addresses a location within the upper memory area, it is
physically addressing a location within one of these devices.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 3-6. Upper Memory Map
Table 3-7. I/O Map
Address Range
Use
Address
Device
0009FC00–0009FFFF
PS/2-mouse data area
0020-003F
Interrupt controller #1
000A0000–000BFFFF
Video RAM
0040-005F
System timers
000C0000–000C7FFF
Video BIOS
0060-006F
Keyboard controller
000C8000–000CFFFF
Available
0070-0071
RTC and NMI enable
000D0000–000DBFFF
Reserved for PC Card
0080-009F
DMA page registers
000F0000–000FFFFF
System BIOS
00A0-00BF
Interrupt controller #2
00100000–0010FFEF
High memory area
00C0-00DF
DMA controller #2
0010FFF0–1FFFFFFF
Extended memory
00F0
Coprocessor busy clear
20000000–FFFBFFFF
Reserved
00F1
Coprocessor busy reset
FFFC0000–FFFFFFFF
BIOS ROM
00F8-00FF
Coprocessor
01F0-01F8
Hard-disk drive controller
0170–0178
CD-ROM controller
0200-0207
Joystick controller
0220-022F
Audio controller
0278-027F
LPT2
02F8-02FF
COM2
0378-037F
LPT1
03C0-03DF
VGA
03E0–03E1
PC Card controller
03F0-03F7
Diskette controller
03F8-03FF
COM1
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym
used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System
User’s Guide.
I/O Map
Table 3-7 provides a map of memory addresses reserved by
the system for peripheral I/O devices. Use the information in
Table 3-7 to determine if the memory address of an external
peripheral (such as a PC Card) conflicts with a memory
address reserved by the system.
Check the documentation of the external I/O device to determine its memory address. If there is a conflict with a memory
address reserved by the system, change the address of the
device.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or
acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the
online System User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-17
Troubleshooting Procedures
This section provides troubleshooting procedures for
components inside your computer (such as a memory
module) and for external devices that connect to your
computer (such as an external monitor). Before performing any of the procedures in this section, see “Basic
Checks” found at the beginning of this chapter and read the
safety instructions at the front of this guide. Then perform the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure for the component or
equipment that is malfunctioning.
diskette, hard-disk drive, or PC Cards, and put
them in a safe place to dry.
4.
Open the input/output (I/O) panel door, and
ground yourself by touching the unpainted metal
surface of the I/O panel.
5.
Remove the options cover from the bottom of the
computer. Remove any memory modules from
their sockets on the system board.
To remove a memory module, carefully spread apart
the inner metal tabs of the memory module socket
just far enough for the memory module to disengage
from the socket (the module should pop up slightly).
Then lift the memory module away from the socket.
NOTE: When you see the question “Is the problem
resolved?” in a troubleshooting procedure, perform the operation that caused the problem to see if the problem still occurs.
6.
Troubleshooting a Wet Computer
Liquids, spills and splashes, rain, and excessive humidity
can cause moisture damage to your computer. If your
computer gets wet or if condensation forms on the computer because of humid conditions, use the following
procedure.
WARNING: Perform step 1 of the following procedure only after you are certain that it is safe to do
so. If your computer is connected to an alternating
current (AC) power source, Dell recommends turning off AC power at the circuit breaker before
attempting to remove the power cables from AC
power. Use the utmost caution when removing wet
cables from live power.
1.
2.
Save all your work, and exit any open application
programs. Then immediately turn off your computer,
and disconnect it from the AC adapter. Disconnect the
AC adapter from AC power. Turn off any attached
peripherals, and disconnect them from their power
sources and then from the computer. Disconnect any
telephone or telecommunication line from the
computer.
Place the computer in a dry area at room temperature. Do not use artificial means to speed up the
drying process.
WARNING: Before continuing with the remainder
of this procedure, verify that the computer is thoroughly dry.
7.
Ground yourself again by touching the unpainted
metal surface of the I/O panel, and close the I/O
panel door.
8.
Reinstall the memory modules into their sockets
on the system board. Then replace the options
cover on the bottom of the computer.
Remove the battery.
Wipe off the battery, and store it in a safe place to
dry.
3.
If the diskette drive, hard-disk drive, or either of
the PC Card slots is wet, remove any installed
3-18
Open the display, and place the computer across
two books or similar props to let air circulate all
around it. Leave the I/O panel door open to
expose the I/O panel and its connectors to the air.
Let the computer dry for at least 24 hours.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
To reinstall a memory module, align the memory
module’s edge connector with the slot in the center
of the memory module socket. Press the memory
module’s edge connector firmly into the socket.
Pivot the memory module down until it clicks into
place. If you do not hear a sharp click, remove the
memory module and reinstall it.
NOTE: Memory modules are keyed, or designed, to
fit into their sockets in only one direction. The sockets on the system board are notched so that the
memory module can be firmly seated only one way.
9.
To reinstall a memory module, align the memory
module’s edge connector with the slot in the center
of the memory module socket. Press the memory
module’s edge connector firmly into the socket.
Pivot the memory module down until it clicks into
place. If you do not hear a sharp click, remove the
memory module and reinstall it.
Reinstall any diskette, hard-disk drive, or
PC Cards that you removed in step 3.
10. Replace the battery.
11. Reconnect your computer and peripherals to AC
power, and turn them on.
12. Does the computer work properly?
NOTE: Memory modules are keyed, or designed, to
fit into their sockets in only one direction. The sockets on the system board are notched so that the
memory module can be firmly seated only one way.
Yes. The problem is resolved.
No. If the computer is able to boot, run the Dell diagnostics to identify computer damage. (See Chapter 4,
“Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.) If
the computer is unable to boot, see “Troubleshooting
a Power Failure” found later in this section. If you
cannot identify the damaged component(s), call Dell
for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
Troubleshooting a Damaged Computer
5.
Verify that any installed PC Cards are properly
seated in the PC Card connectors. Verify that the
hard-disk drive is properly installed.
6.
Replace the battery.
7.
Reconnect your computer and peripherals to AC
power, and turn them on.
8.
Run the Dell diagnostics to verify that the computer
is operating properly. (See Chapter 4, “Running the
Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.)
9.
If the computer does not operate properly, make
a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist found in
Chapter 5 and fill it out. Then call Dell for technical assistance. (For instructions, see Chapter 5,
“Getting Help.”)
If your computer is dropped or damaged, use the following procedure.
NOTE: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is
set to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
1.
Turn off your computer, and disconnect it from
the AC adapter. Then disconnect the AC adapter
from AC power. Turn off any attached peripherals, and disconnect them from their power
sources and then from the computer.
2.
Save all your work, exit any open application programs, and remove the battery.
3.
Open the I/O panel door, and ground yourself by
touching the unpainted metal surface of the I/O
panel.
4.
Remove the options cover from the bottom of the
computer. Remove and reinstall any memory
modules in the memory module sockets, and then
replace the options cover.
Troubleshooting a Power Failure
Occasionally, you may experience a power failure in all
or part of your computer. A total power failure is indicated by the absence of electrical activity (such as lights
and sounds) from the keyboard, display, hard-disk drive,
and diskette drive. In a partial power failure, one or more
of these indicators shows that there is power to a part of
the computer.
To determine if there is any power to the computer, make a
copy of the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5 and fill
it out as you complete the following procedure.
To remove a memory module, carefully spread apart
the inner metal tabs of the memory module socket just
far enough for the memory module to disengage from
the socket (the module should pop up slightly). Then lift
the memory module away from the socket.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-19
NOTE: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is
set to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
1.
Turn on the computer. Are the power indicator,
low-battery indicator, and charging indicator
flashing?
Yes. Continue to step 2.
No. Go to step 3.
2.
Save all your work, exit any open application programs, turn off the computer, disconnect the AC
adapter, and remove the battery. Then reinstall
the battery, reconnect the AC adapter, and turn
on the computer. Are the power indicator, lowbattery indicator, and charging indicator
flashing?
Total Power Failure When Using the AC
Adapter
If no signs of power are present in the computer when
using the AC adapter, make a copy of the Diagnostics
Checklist found in Chapter 5 and fill it out as you complete the following procedure.
NOTE: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is set
to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
1.
Turn off the computer and peripherals. Disconnect the peripherals from AC power. If you are
using a surge protector, remove it.
2.
Make sure the AC adapter is connected to the
computer, and verify that the power cable is
firmly attached to the AC adapter and to the AC
power source.
Yes. Go to step 6.
No. Continue to step 3.
3.
4.
Turn off the computer. Then restart the computer, and hold the power switch in the ON
position for 10 seconds. Do the indicators light
up?
See “Checking Connections” found earlier in this
chapter.
3.
Yes. Your computer is receiving power. Continue to
step 4.
Allow one minute for the computer to initialize its
components before checking for signs of power.
No. Your computer is not receiving power. Go to
step 5.
Yes. The problem is resolved.
Release the power switch. Does the computer
boot successfully?
Yes. The problem is resolved.
No. Continue to step 4.
4.
Turn off the computer, and disconnect the AC
adapter from its power source.
5.
Connect another electrical device, such as a lamp,
to the power source from which you disconnected
the AC adapter.
6.
Turn on the electrical device. Does the device
function properly?
No. Go to step 6.
5.
Reseat the battery, and check the AC adapter
connection. Do the indicators light up?
Yes. The problem is resolved.
6.
Turn on the computer, and hold the power switch
in the ON position for 10 seconds. Do the indicators light up?
No. If the computer is powered by the AC adapter,
see the next subsection, “Total Power Failure When
Using the AC Adapter.” If the computer is powered
by a battery, see “Total Power Failure When Using
the Battery” found later in this section.
If no other electrical device is available, continue to
step 7.
Call Dell for technical assistance.
No. Continue to step 7.
See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.
3-20
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Yes. Power is available at the power source. See “No
Power to a Part of the Computer” found later in this
section.
7.
Connect the AC adapter to a different AC power
source, and turn on the computer. Do the indicators light up?
Allow one minute for the computer to initialize its
components before checking for signs of power.
4.
Yes. Continue to step 5.
No. The problem is resolved.
5.
No. Continue to step 8.
Call Dell for technical assistance.
6.
See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.
Turn on the computer. Are the charging indicator
and the low-battery indicator flashing?
Yes. Your computer may be in a hot environment.
Charging the battery in this condition may affect the
life span of the battery. Continue to step 7.
Total Power Failure When Using the Battery
If an AC adapter is not connected to your computer, the
computer’s power source is its battery. If the power indicator does not light up when you turn on the computer,
the battery’s charge may be depleted. If the low-battery
indicator and the charging indicator are both flashing, the
battery may be defective. To troubleshoot this problem,
make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5 and fill it out as you complete the following
procedure.
Fully charge the battery.
For instructions, see the topic titled “Charging the
Battery” in the online System User’s Guide.
Yes. The problem is resolved.
8.
Is the low-battery indicator flashing?
No. The problem is resolved.
7.
Disconnect the computer from AC power. Are the
charging indicator and the low-battery indicator
still flashing?
Yes. You may have a defective battery. Continue to
step 8.
No. The problem is resolved.
8.
NOTE: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is
set to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
Remove the battery, and press its test button. Is
the uppermost indicator in the charge gauge of
the battery flashing?
Yes. You have a defective battery. Continue to step 9.
No. The problem is resolved.
1.
Turn off the computer and peripherals, and disconnect them from AC power.
9.
2.
Reseat the battery by removing it from the battery compartment and then replacing the battery
in its compartment.
10. Turn on the computer. Is the power indicator on
and the low-battery indicator off?
3.
Turn on the computer, and hold the power switch
in the ON position for 10 seconds. Do the indicators light up?
Allow one minute for the computer to initialize its
components before checking for signs of power.
If a spare battery is available, fully charge it, and
then install it in the computer.
Yes. Your original battery is defective. Call Dell for
technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,”
for instructions.)
No. Call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.)
Yes. Continue to step 4.
No Power to a Part of the Computer
No. Use the AC adapter to connect your computer to
AC power. If the computer operates normally
when using AC power, go to step 7. If the computer
does not boot when using the AC adapter, see the
previous subsection, “Total Power Failure When
Using the AC Adapter.”
If the power indicator shows that your computer is
receiving power, but the display remains blank, part of
your computer is probably not receiving power. To troubleshoot this problem, make a copy of the Diagnostics
Checklist found in Chapter 5 and fill it out as you complete the following procedure.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-21
NOTE: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is
set to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
1.
Turn off the computer and peripherals, and disconnect them from AC power. Disconnect any
attached peripherals from the computer.
2.
Make sure that the AC adapter is connected to
the computer and to AC power, or confirm that a
fully charged battery is properly seated in its
compartment.
3.
Turn on the computer. Is the display on?
Allow one minute for the computer to initialize its
components before checking for signs of power.
Yes. The entire computer is receiving power; the
problem is resolved.
4.
external monitor and run the Dell diagnostics. (See
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for
instructions.) If you cannot isolate the problem after
running the diagnostics, call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for
instructions.)
Troubleshooting the Diskette Drive
During the power-on self-test (POST), the computer
checks the diskette drive, comparing its characteristics
with the system configuration information. (The diskettedrive access indicator blinks as the computer performs
this check.)
If a failure occurs with the drive, make a copy of the
Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5 and fill it out as
you complete the following procedure.
No. Adjust the brightness and contrast of the display.
If the display still does not show an image, continue
to step 4.
NOTE: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is
set to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
Turn off the computer, and reseat (remove and
reinstall) any installed memory modules.
1.
To remove a memory module, carefully spread apart
the inner metal tabs of the memory module socket just
far enough for the memory module to disengage from
the socket (the module should pop up slightly). Then lift
the memory module away from the socket.
To reinstall a memory module, align the memory
module’s edge connector with the slot in the center
of the memory module socket. Press the memory
module’s edge connector firmly into the socket.
Pivot the memory module down until it clicks into
place. If you do not hear a sharp click, remove the
memory module and reinstall it.
Yes. Continue to step 2.
No. Go to step 5.
2.
No. Go to step 5.
3.
Insert a bootable 1.44-MB diskette into the drive,
and reboot the computer.
4.
Does the diskette-drive access indicator blink
during the boot routine, and does the drive boot
the operating system?
Yes. The diskette drive problem has probably been
resolved. If you continue to experience trouble, continue to step 5.
Turn on the computer. Is the display on?
Yes. The entire computer is receiving power; the
problem is resolved.
No. Continue to step 5.
5.
No. The display may be defective. See “Troubleshooting the Built-In Display” found later in this
section. If the display still does not work, connect an
3-22
Does the computer display a drive error message?
Yes. See Table 3-2 for an explanation of the message,
and then continue to step 3.
NOTE: Memory modules are keyed, or designed, to
fit into their sockets in only one direction. The sockets on the system board are notched so that the
memory module can be firmly seated only one way.
5.
Reboot the computer by pressing
<CTRL><ALT><DEL>. Does the diskette-drive access
indicator blink during the boot routine?
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Call Dell for technical assistance.
See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.
Troubleshooting the CD-ROM Drive
During POST, the computer checks the CD-ROM drive,
comparing its characteristics with the system configuration information. (The hard-disk drive/CD-ROM drive
access indicator blinks as the computer performs this
check.)
NOTE: If you are using MS-DOS only, check the
config.sys and autoexec.bat files before using the
following procedure. If necessary, add the following
statement to the config.sys file:
device=c:\tsy\tsycdrom.sys. If necessary,
add the following statement to the autoexe.bat file:
c:\dos\hscdex.exe /d:tsycdl. Then save the
changes and reboot the computer. If the problem persists,
use the following troubleshooting procedure before calling Dell.
4.
The diskette must contain the same config.sys and
autoexec.bat files that are on the hard-disk drive.
5.
2.
Turn off the computer, or reboot it by pressing
the <CTRL><ALT><DEL> key combination. Does
the hard-disk drive/CD-ROM drive access indicator blink during POST?
No. Go to step 6.
6.
Insert the Dell Diagnostics Diskette into drive A,
and reboot the computer. Then run the IDE CD
ROM Drives Test Group. Does your CD-ROM
drive pass all the tests?
Yes. Return to step 1, and perform this troubleshooting procedure again. If you continue to experience
trouble, call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.)
No. Go to step 7.
7.
Call Dell for technical assistance.
See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.
Yes. Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting the Hard-Disk Drive
No. Go to step 2.
During POST, the computer checks the hard-disk drive,
comparing its characteristics with the system configuration information. (The hard-disk drive/CD-ROM drive
access indicator blinks as the computer performs this
check.) If a failure occurs with the drive, make a copy of
the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5 and fill it
out as you complete the following procedure.
Remove the hard-disk drive and boot the computer. Does the hard-disk drive/CD-ROM drive
access indicator blink during POST?
Yes. Go to step 3.
No. Go to step 6.
3.
Type d: and press <ENTER>. Then type dir and
press <ENTER>. Does MS-DOS display the root
directory contents for drive D?
Yes. The problem is resolved.
If a failure occurs with the drive, make a copy of the
Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5 and fill it out as
you complete the following procedure:
1.
Insert a bootable diskette into drive A, and reboot
the computer.
Reinstall the hard-disk drive. Then check the
config.sys file (in the Microsoft Windows 95 operating system, check the CD-ROM configuration
in the Settings folder). Is the CD-ROM driver
(tsycdrom.sys) installed?
Yes. Go to step 4.
No. Load the driver and return to step 1 to begin this
procedure again. (To load the driver, use the program
diskette sets you made when you first received your
Dell computer.)
NOTES: If you have another hard-disk drive that you
know is in good condition, install it in your computer
before you begin this procedure and perform the operation that caused you to suspect a hard-disk drive failure.
If there is no evidence of a drive failure with the second
drive installed, the first drive is probably defective. If the
second drive fails, reinstall the first drive and start the
following procedure.
Before you begin this procedure, make sure that the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is set to
ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup Program” in Chapter 2.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-23
1.
Reboot the computer by pressing
<CTRL><ALT><DEL>. Does the hard-disk drive/CDROM drive access indicator blink during the boot
routine, and does the drive boot the operating
system?
7.
Yes. The hard-disk drive may contain a corrupted
operating system or it may have bad sectors. Reinstall the operating system as described in the
documentation that accompanied your operating system. If reinstalling the operating system does not
correct the problem, continue to step 8.
Yes. If a message appears on the display, see
Table 3-2 for an explanation of the message and possible corrective actions. Then go to step 6.
No. Continue to step 2.
2.
3.
Insert your operating system diskette into drive
A, and reboot the computer.
Type c: and press <ENTER>. Then type dir and
press <ENTER>. Does MS-DOS display the root
directory contents for drive C?
Yes. Go to step 5.
No. Continue to step 4.
4.
If your hard-disk drive has more than one logical
drive, type d: and press <ENTER>. Then type dir
and press <ENTER>. Does MS-DOS display the root
directory contents for drive D?
Yes. Continue to step 5.
No. You may have a corrupted boot sector or file
allocation table (FAT) on drive C. Go to step 8.
5.
Rename your autoexec.bat and config.sys files,
remove the operating system diskette from drive A,
and reboot the computer. Does the operating system
load now?
Yes. You have an error in your autoexec.bat or config.sys file. Use a text editor to examine the contents
of these files and locate the error. For information on
the correct syntax for commands in these files, see
the documentation that accompanied your operating
system.
No. Continue to step 8.
8.
Insert your diagnostics diskette into drive A, and
reboot the computer. Then run the Hard-Disk
Drive Test Group. Does your drive pass all the
tests?
Troubleshooting an External Keyboard
or External Keypad
During POST, the computer checks to see if an external
keyboard or keypad is connected. If an external keyboard
is connected, the computer recognizes both the built-in
and the external keyboards. If an external keypad is connected, the computer recognizes the external keypad and
the built-in keyboard, but does not recognize the embedded numeric keypad. If an attached external keyboard or
keypad does not work when you boot the computer, make a
copy of the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5 and fill
it out as you complete the following procedure.
NOTES: If you use a PS/2 “Y” adapter to connect an
external device to the computer’s PS/2 connector, the
device does not work.
Before you begin this procedure, make sure that the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is set to
ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup Program” in Chapter 2.
1.
Make sure the cable from the external keyboard
or keypad is firmly connected to the external keyboard/keypad/mouse connector on the back of the
computer. (See “Checking Connections” found
earlier in this chapter.)
2.
If you are using a keyboard with various switch
settings, make sure the switch is set to “PS/2,”
“Enhanced XT/AT,” or “PC/AT.”
Yes. Continue to step 7.
No. Go to step 8.
3-24
Call Dell for technical assistance.
See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.
No. Continue to step 6.
6.
Replace your diagnostics diskette with the operating system diskette, and reboot the computer.
Does the operating system load now?
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
The switch settings are usually on the bottom of the
keyboard, sometimes behind a panel tab.
3.
Reboot the computer by pressing
<CTRL><ALT><DEL>. During the boot routine, do
the Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock indicators on the external keyboard flash momentarily?
Yes. Continue to step 4.
No. You may have a defective keyboard port fuse.
Go to step 7.
4.
Does the computer recognize the external keyboard or keypad?
Use the external keyboard or keypad to type some
characters. Do they appear on the display?
Yes. The problem is resolved.
No. Continue to step 5.
5.
Turn off the computer, and disconnect the external keyboard or keypad from the computer.
6.
Reboot the computer by pressing
<CTRL><ALT><DEL>. Is the computer recognizing
the built-in keyboard?
Allow one minute for the computer to initialize its
components. Then use the computer’s built-in keyboard to type some characters. Do the characters
appear on the display?
Yes. The external keyboard may be defective. Run
the Keyboard Test Group in the Dell diagnostics.
(See Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for
instructions.) If you cannot isolate the problem after
running the diagnostics, call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for
instructions.)
No. The computer’s keyboard controller on the system board may be defective. Run the Keyboard
Controller Test in the Dell diagnostics. (See
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for
instructions.) If you cannot isolate the problem after
running the diagnostics, call Dell for technical
assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for
instructions.)
7.
Call Dell for technical assistance.
See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.
Troubleshooting Memory
During POST, the computer checks the computer’s memory, and then writes to and reads from the number of
available bytes to ensure proper operation. (The computer counts the bytes and displays the count on the
display. Pressing the <SPACEBAR> interrupts this count and
moves the computer to the next phase of POST.) If the memory count displayed is less than the amount installed, or if the
computer fails during the count, make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5 and fill it out as you
complete the following procedure.
NOTE: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is
set to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
1.
Reboot the computer. Does the random-access
memory (RAM) count displayed correctly match
the actual amount of memory installed in the
computer?
Yes. The computer needed to update the memory; the
memory check phase is now OK.
No. Continue to step 2.
2.
Turn off the computer and reseat (remove and
reinstall) any installed memory modules in your
computer.
Loose or disconnected memory modules may cause
intermittent memory problems. Removing and reinstalling, or reseating, memory modules often corrects
the problem.
To remove a memory module, carefully spread apart
the inner metal tabs of the memory module socket just
far enough for the memory module to disengage from
the socket (the module should pop up slightly). Then lift
the memory module away from the socket.
To reinstall a memory module, align the memory
module’s edge connector with the slot in the center
of the memory module socket. Press the memory
module’s edge connector firmly into the socket.
Pivot the memory module down until it clicks into
place. If you do not hear a sharp click, remove the
memory module and reinstall it.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-25
NOTE: Memory modules are keyed, or designed, to
fit into their sockets in only one direction. The sockets on the system board are notched so that the
memory module can be firmly seated only one way.
3.
Turn on your computer. Does the RAM count
complete?
Yes. A memory module was loose; the memory
check phase is now OK.
the AC adapter. Press a key on the keyboard. If the
display is still not readable, continue to step 3.
No. Continue to step 3.
3.
Turn off the computer and any attached peripherals. Disconnect all peripherals from the
computer.
4.
Make sure the AC adapter is firmly connected to
the computer and to an AC power source, or verify that a fully charged battery is properly seated
in its compartment.
5.
Turn on the computer. Is the display on?
No. Continue to step 4.
4.
Run the Dell diagnostics.
For instructions, see Chapter 4, “Running the Dell
Diagnostics.” If you get any error messages when running the tests, call Dell for technical assistance. (See
Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.)
Allow one minute for the computer to initialize its
components.
Yes. Continue to step 6.
No. Go to step 8.
Troubleshooting the Built-In Display
If the computer is receiving power, but nothing appears
on your display (such as light, text, or graphics) or the
display image does not appear as you would expect,
make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5 and fill it out as you complete the following
procedure.
NOTES: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is
set to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
6.
NOTE: Contrast cannot be adjusted on the activematrix color display.
Yes. Continue to step 7.
No. Go to step 8.
7.
The highest video resolution supported by your built-in
display is 800 x 600 pixels. If your application program
uses a higher resolution, you must attach an external
monitor to your computer.
1.
If the computer is running, press a key to exit
standby mode or suspend mode or to reactivate
the display. Is the full display readable?
No. If you still have a display problem but the display is not completely blank, run the Video Test
Group in the Dell diagnostics. (See Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.) Then
call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5,
“Getting Help.”)
No. Continue to step 2.
If the computer is running, is the low-battery
indicator blinking?
8.
Yes. The display turns off when the final low-battery
warning occurs. Replace the battery or connect the
computer to alternating current (AC) power through
3-26
Has an error message appeared on the display, or
has a beep code sounded?
Yes. Refer to Table 3-2 or Table 3-3 to find the message or beep code, respectively, along with its
explanation. If you can’t find the message or code,
call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5,
“Getting Help,” for instructions.)
Yes. The computer was in standby or suspend mode,
or the display time-out feature was activated. The
problem is resolved.
2.
Use the <FN><↓> or <FN><↑> key combination to
adjust the brightness. Use the <FN><←> or
<FN><→> key combination to adjust the contrast. Is
the full display readable?
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Turn off your computer, and connect an external
monitor to the computer.
Follow the procedure in the topic titled “Connecting
an External Monitor” in the online System User’s
Guide.
9.
Turn on the computer and the monitor, and
adjust the monitor’s brightness and contrast controls. Is the monitor readable?
4.
Yes. The computer’s display may be defective. Call
Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
NOTE: Contrast cannot be adjusted on the activematrix color display.
No. The computer’s video controller on the system
board may be defective. Run the Video Test Group
of the Dell diagnostics. (See Chapter 4, “Running the
Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.) If you cannot
isolate the problem after running the diagnostics, call
Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help.”)
Troubleshooting an External Monitor
Yes. The external monitor may be defective. Continue to step 5.
No. The video controller on the system board may be
defective. Run the Video Test Group of the Dell
diagnostics. (See Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for instructions.) If you cannot isolate the
problem, call Dell for technical assistance. (See
Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.)
5.
During POST, the computer checks to see if an external
monitor is attached to the computer; if one is, the video
control circuitry sends information to the external monitor rather than to the computer’s display. If no image
appears on the external monitor you are using when the
computer boots, make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5 and fill it out as you complete the
following procedure.
NOTE: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is
set to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
1.
2.
Make sure the external monitor’s video cable is
firmly connected to the computer’s monitor connector, and verify that the monitor’s power cable
(if it has one) is firmly plugged into an AC power
source. Make sure the monitor is turned on.
Reboot the computer by pressing
<CTRL><ALT><DEL>, and then adjust the monitor’s
brightness and contrast controls. Is the monitor
readable?
Allow one minute for the computer to initialize its
components.
Yes. The problem is resolved.
No. Continue to step 3.
3.
Raise the built-in display into viewing position,
if necessary, and press <FN><F8> or
<CTRL><ALT><F8> to switch the video image from
the external monitor to the display.
Use the <FN><↓> or <FN><↑> key combination to
adjust the brightness. Use the <FN><←> or
<FN><→> key combination to adjust the contrast. Is
the full display readable?
Turn off the computer and any attached peripherals. Disconnect all peripherals from the
computer. Attach another external monitor to the
computer.
For instructions, see the topic titled “Connecting an
External Monitor” in the online System User’s Guide.
If you do not have another external monitor, call Dell for
technical assistance. See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for
instructions.
6.
Reboot the computer, and adjust the monitor’s
brightness and contrast. Is the monitor readable?
Allow one minute for the computer to initialize its
components.
Yes. The original monitor is defective. Call Dell for
technical assistance. See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,”
for instructions.
No. Call Dell for technical assistance. See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.
Troubleshooting Serial and Parallel
Ports
This section provides a procedure for troubleshooting the
ports on your computer’s serial and parallel ports (shown
in Figure 3-3) and any attached peripheral devices. This
section also provides a procedure for troubleshooting the
computer’s infrared ports.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-27
If a system error message indicates a port problem or if
equipment connected to a port seems to perform incorrectly or not at all, the source of the problem may be any
of the following:
3.
Check the contents of the initialization and startup files. (See “Installing and Configuring Software” found earlier in this chapter.)
Are the port configuration commands correct?
•
A faulty connection between the I/O port and the
peripheral device
•
•
Incorrect settings for system setup options
•
A faulty cable between the I/O port and the
peripheral device
•
•
•
•
A faulty peripheral device
If the port problem is confined to a particular application program, see the application program’s
documentation for specific port configuration
requirements.
Faulty I/O port logic on the system board
Is the problem resolved?
Conflicting COM port settings
Yes. You have fixed the problem.
Lack of device drivers
No. Continue to step 5.
Incorrect settings in the operating system’s
configuration files
Troubleshooting the Basic I/O Functions
Yes. Go to step 5.
No. Continue to step 4.
4.
5.
Make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5, and fill it out as you complete the following
procedure.
Check the settings for the SERIAL PORT and PARALLEL MODE setup options.
Do the tests complete successfully?
For information on configuring the ports, see Chapter 2, “Customizing System Features.” Are the communication port options set correctly for the
peripheral devices connected to the computer?
Yes. Go to step 3.
Yes. Continue to step 6.
No. Call Dell for technical assistance. See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.
6.
No. Continue to step 2.
2.
Insert the Dell Diagnostics Diskette into drive A,
reboot the computer, and run the Serial/Infrared
Ports Test Group and/or the Parallel Ports Test
Group. (See Chapter 4, “Running the Dell
Diagnostics.”)
The Serial/Infrared Ports Test Group and the Parallel
Ports Test Group check the basic functions of the system
board’s I/O port logic. Also, if a parallel printer is connected to the parallel port, the Parallel Port Test Group
tests the communication link between the system
board’s I/O port logic and the printer.
NOTE: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is
set to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
1.
Change the necessary statements in the start-up
files.
Change the SERIAL PORT and PARALLEL MODE
options to the appropriate settings; then reboot the
system.
The problem may be with the external device.
Go to the next subsection, “Troubleshooting a
Parallel Printer,” or to “Troubleshooting a Serial
I/O Device” or “Troubleshooting the Infrared
Ports,” found later in this section, depending on
which device appears to be malfunctioning.
Is the problem resolved?
Yes. You have fixed the problem.
No. Continue to step 3.
3-28
Troubleshooting a Parallel Printer
If the preceding procedure, “Troubleshooting the Basic
I/O Functions,” indicates that the problem is with a parallel printer, use the following procedure.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
NOTE: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is
set to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
1.
1.
Turn off the computer and the serial device, and
swap the interface cable (which connects the device
to the serial port) with a comparable working cable.
2.
Turn on the computer and the serial device.
Turn off the computer and the serial device, and
swap the interface cable (which connects the device
to the serial port) with a comparable working cable.
2.
Turn on the parallel printer and computer.
3.
Attempt a print operation on the parallel printer.
Does the print operation complete successfully?
Is the problem resolved?
Yes. You probably need a new interface cable. Call
Dell for technical assistance. See Chapter 5, “Getting
Help,” for instructions.
No. Continue to step 3.
3.
Yes. You probably need a new interface cable. Call
Dell for technical assistance. See Chapter 5, “Getting
Help,” for instructions.
For example, if your serial mouse has a problem,
swap it with a serial mouse you know is working
properly.
No. Continue to step 4.
4.
Run the parallel printer’s self-test.
Does the self-test complete successfully?
4.
Yes. You probably need a new device. Call Dell for
technical assistance. See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,”
for instructions.
No. The printer is probably defective. If you bought
the printer from Dell, call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for
instructions.) If you bought the printer elsewhere,
take it to one of the manufacturer’s authorized service centers for repair.
Attempt another print operation on the parallel
printer.
Does the print operation complete successfully?
Yes. The problem is resolved.
No. Call Dell for technical assistance. See Chapter 5,
“Getting Help,” for instructions.
Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device
If the procedure titled “Troubleshooting the Basic I/O
Functions” found earlier in this section indicates that the
problem is with a device connected to one of the serial
ports, use the following procedure.
NOTE: Before you begin this procedure, make sure that
the SYSTEM SWITCH option in the System Setup program is
set to ON/OFF. For instructions, see “Using the System Setup
Program” in Chapter 2.
Turn on the computer and the serial device.
Is the problem resolved?
Yes. Continue to step 5.
5.
Turn off the computer and the serial device, and
swap the device with a comparable working
device.
No. Call Dell for technical assistance. See Chapter 5,
“Getting Help,” for instructions.
Troubleshooting the Infrared Ports
This section provides a procedure for troubleshooting the
computer’s infrared ports. Use the following procedure to
check one port at a time.
Make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5, and fill it out as you complete the following
procedure:
1.
Check the setting for the INFRARED DATA PORT
option in the System Setup program.
For information on the System Setup program, see
Chapter 2, “Customizing System Features.” Is the
INFRARED DATA PORT option set correctly for the
external device with which you are communicating?
You may need to check the documentation that
accompanied the device to determine the proper
setting.
Yes. Go to step 3.
No. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting Your Computer
3-29
2.
Change the INFRARED DATA PORT option to the
appropriate settings, and then reboot the system.
Is the problem resolved?
Yes. The problem is resolved.
Make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5, and fill it out as you complete the following
procedure:
1.
No. Go to step 3.
3.
Insert the Dell Diagnostics Diskette into drive A,
reboot the computer, and run the Serial/Infrared
Ports Test Group in the Dell diagnostics. (See
Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics.”) Do
the tests complete successfully?
Yes. All sound functions had been muted. Pressing
<FN><END> turns the sound back on. The problem is
resolved.
No. Go to step 2.
2.
The Serial/Infrared Ports Test Group checks the
basic functions of the computer’s infrared logic.
Yes. The infrared ports are functioning properly.
There may be a problem with the infrared application program or with the external device. Check the
documentation that came with the application program and with the external device.
Press <FN><END>. Do the built-in speakers emit a
beep?
Press <FN><END> again. Then press
<FN><PAGE UP> several times. Can you hear
sound coming from the built-in speakers?
Yes. The volume was too low. Pressing the
<FN><PAGE UP> key combination increases the
volume. The problem is resolved.
No. Go to step 3.
3.
No. Call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.)
Troubleshooting Audio Functions
This section provides a procedure for troubleshooting the
computer’s sound functions.
Insert the Dell Diagnostics Diskette into drive A,
reboot the computer, and run the Audio Test
Group in the Dell diagnostics. (See Chapter 4,
“Running the Dell Diagnostics.”) Do the tests
complete successfully?
The Audio Test Group checks the functionality of
the audio controller.
Yes. The controller is functioning properly. If the
problem persists, call Dell for technical assistance.
(See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.)
No. Call Dell for technical assistance. (See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions.)
3-30
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Chapter 4
Running the Dell Diagnostics
U
nlike many diagnostic programs, the Dell diagnostics
helps you check the computer’s hardware without any
diagnostic test groups or subtests also have these helpful
features:
additional equipment and without destroying any data.
By using the Dell diagnostics, you can have confidence
in the computer’s operation. If you find a problem you
cannot solve by yourself, the Dell diagnostic tests can
provide you with important information you will need
when talking to Dell’s service and support personnel.
•
Options that let you run tests individually or
collectively
•
An option that allows you to choose the number of
times a test group or subtest is repeated
•
The ability to display test results, print them, or save
them in a file
CAUTION: Use the Dell diagnostics to test only your
Dell computer. Using this program with other computers
may cause incorrect computer responses or result in misleading error messages.
•
Options to suspend testing when an adjustable error
limit is reached
•
A menu option called ABOUT that briefly describes each
test and its parameters
NOTE: If the computer does not boot, call Dell for technical assistance. See Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for
instructions.
•
Status messages that inform you whether test groups
or subtests were completed successfully
•
Error messages that appear if any problems are
detected
Features of the Dell Diagnostics
To troubleshoot components or devices, run the appropriate test (test group or subtest) in the diagnostics on your Dell
Diagnostics Diskette. The diagnostics program exercises the
functional components and devices of the computer more
vigorously and thoroughly than they are exercised during
normal operation.
The Dell diagnostics provides a series of menus and
options from which you choose particular test groups or
subtests. Each diagnostic test group or subtest allows you
to control important testing parameters. You can also
control the sequence in which the tests are run. The
When to Use
the Dell Diagnostics
Whenever a major component or device in the computer
does not function properly, the component or device may
have failed. As long as the microprocessor and input/
output (I/O) components of the computer (the display,
keyboard, and diskette drive) are working, use the Dell
diagnostics. If you are experienced with computers and
know which component(s) you need to test, select the
appropriate diagnostic test group(s) or subtest(s). If you
are unsure about how to begin diagnosing a problem,
read the rest of this chapter.
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-1
Before You Start Testing
Follow these steps to safeguard your master copy of the
Dell Diagnostics Diskette:
1.
Make a working copy of the Dell Diagnostics Diskette
on a blank diskette.
Refer to your operating system’s documentation for
information on how to duplicate diskettes. Put the
original diskette away for safekeeping.
When you start the diagnostics, the Dell logo screen
appears, and a program tests the random-access memory
(RAM) that will be used by the diagnostics.
If a failure in RAM is detected, a message appears on the
screen telling you the memory address of the defective
memory module. Write down the memory address and
see Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” for instructions on obtaining technical assistance.
If no errors are found in RAM, the diagnostics loads and
the Diagnostics Menu appears (see Figure 4-1). The
menu allows you to exit to the MS-DOS prompt.
2.
Turn on your printer, if one is attached, and make
sure it is online.
3.
Confirm the computer’s system configuration
information, and enable all its components and
devices, such as ports.
Dell Computer Corporation
Dell Latitude XPi CD Diagnostics Version X.XX
For instructions, see Chapter 2, “Customizing System Configurations.”
DIAGNOSTICS MENU
4.
Disable all system setup options for power
management.
Run All Tests
RUn Quick Tests
Run Specific Tests
Exit To MS-DOS
For instructions, see the topics titled “Using the Dell
Control Center Power Saver Window” and “Dell
Control Center” in the online System User’s Guide.
Or, see “Power Management” in Chapter 2 of this
guide.
5.
Attach an AC adapter to the computer.
Although it is possible to run the Dell Diagnostics on
a computer using battery power, connecting the computer to AC power helps ensure that power will not
be lost during the tests.
Starting the Dell Diagnostics
After you complete the preliminary instructions specified
in the previous section, follow these steps to start the
diagnostics:
1.
Turn off the computer.
2.
Place the Dell Diagnostics Diskette in the diskette
drive, and boot the computer.
Figure 4-1. Diagnostics Menu
For a quick check of your system, select the RUN QUICK
TESTS option. This option runs only the subtests that do not
require user interaction and that do not take a long time to run.
Dell recommends that you choose this option first to increase the
odds of tracing the source of the problem quickly. For a complete check of your system, select the RUN ALL TESTS option. To
check a particular area of your system, select the RUN SPECIFIC
TESTS option.
NOTE: Before you read the rest of this chapter, you may
want to start the Dell diagnostics so you can see the
menus on your display.
4-2
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
How to Use the Dell Diagnostics
When you select RUN ALL TESTS or RUN SPECIFIC TESTS
from the Diagnostics Menu, the main screen of the diagnostics
appears (see Figure 4-2). The main screen lists the diagnostic test
groups, gives information about the configuration of the computer, and allows you to select options from a menu.
To select an option from the Diagnostics Menu, highlight
the option and press <ENTER>, or press the key that corresponds to the highlighted letter in the option.
Information on the main screen of the diagnostics is presented in the following five areas:
•
Two lines at the top of the screen identify the
diagnostics and give its version number.
•
On the left side of the screen, the Available Test
Groups area lists the diagnostic test groups in the
order they will be run if you select the RUN menu
option and then the ALL menu option. Press the up- or
down-arrow key to highlight a test group.
•
On the right side of the screen, the System Configuration area lists the computer’s current hardware
settings.
•
On the lower-right side of the screen, the IDE Drive
Information area displays information about your
hard-disk drive.
Two lines at the bottom of the screen make up the menu
area. The first line lists the options you can select; press
the left- or right-arrow key to highlight a menu option.
The second line gives information about the option currently highlighted.
CAUTION: While the diagnostic tests are running,
do not interrupt the tests, do not unplug the AC
adapter, and do not reboot the computer. Interrupting the tests in any of these ways could lead to
the loss of system data. It is important to quit the
diagnostic program correctly because the program
writes data to the computer’s memory that can
cause problems unless properly cleared.
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-3
Dell Computer Corporation
Dell Latitude XPi CD Diagnostics Version X.XX
Available Test Groups
System Configuration
Processor
Pentium
Memory
16 MB
Secondary Cache
256
Video
SVGA,1.1 MB
Keyboard
Integrated
Diskette Drives
A:1.4MB, B:NONE
Serial Ports
1
Parallel Ports
1
Mouse
Integrated
Modems
None
SCSI Devices
None
Network Interface
None
Serial IR Ports
Integrated
IDE Drive Information*
RAM
System Set
Video
Keyboard
Mouse
Diskette Drives
Hard-Disk Drives (Non-SCSI)
IDE CD ROM Drives
Serial/Infrared Ports
Parallel Ports
SCSI Devices
Network Interface
Audio
0
1
2
3
Main: Run Select Subtest
Display the Run Menu.
Options
809MB, 1571 Cyl, 16 Hd, 63 Sec
NONE
NONE
NONE
Test Limits
About
Key-Help Quit
Press Q to Quit
* The CD-ROM drive is recognized as IDE Drive 2.
NOTE: The options displayed on your screen reflect the hardware configuration of the computer system.
Figure 4-2. Main Screen of the Dell Diagnostics
Confirming the System
•
Identification tests of the microprocessor, the video
controller, the keyboard controller, and other key
components
•
Basic input/output system (BIOS) configuration
information temporarily saved in RAM
Configuration Information
When you boot the computer from your diagnostics diskette, the diagnostics checks your system configuration
information and displays it in the System Configuration area on
the main screen.
The following sources supply this configuration information for the diagnostics:
•
4-4
The system configuration information that you
selected through the system setup options
Do not be concerned if the System Configuration area
does not list the names of all the components or devices
you know are part of the computer. For example, you
may not see a printer listed, although you know one is
attached to the computer. Instead, the printer is listed as a
parallel port. The computer recognizes the parallel port
as LPT1, which is an address that tells the computer
where to send outgoing information and where to look
for incoming information. Because your printer is a
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
parallel communications device, the computer recognizes the
printer by its LPT1 address and identifies it as a parallel port.
How to Use the Menu
One of the menu options is already highlighted at the bottom of the screen. You can move the highlighting from
one option to another by pressing the left- or right-arrow
key. As you move from one menu option to another, a
brief explanation of the currently highlighted option
appears on the bottom line of the screen.
If you want more information about a test group or subtest, move the highlight to the ABOUT option and press
<ENTER>. After reading the information, press <ESC> to return
to the previous screen.
Run
RUN displays five options: ONE, SELECTED, ALL, KEYHELP, and QUIT MENU. If you select ONE, only the highlighted test group is run. If you choose SELECTED, the
computer runs the test groups, or subtests selected within
the test groups that you selected. (Select test groups or
subtests within test groups with the SELECT or SUBTEST
options, described in the following subsections.) If you
select ALL, all of the subtests in all of the test groups are
run. (The test groups or subtests are run in the same order
as they are listed.)
The KEY-HELP option displays a list of key controls available
for the selected option. The QUIT MENU option returns you to
the Main menu.
Select
allows you to select individual test groups to tailor the testing process to your particular needs. You can
choose one or more test groups and run them sequentially
or individually. When you choose SELECT, five options
are displayed: ALL, ONE, CLEAR ALL, KEY-HELP, and
QUIT MENU.
SELECT
Main Menu Options
The Main menu of the diagnostics main screen lists eight
options: RUN, SELECT, SUBTEST, OPTIONS, TEST LIMITS,
ABOUT, KEY-HELP, and QUIT.
NOTE: Before running any test groups or subtests (by
selecting RUN and then ALL), you should consider setting global parameters within the OPTIONS option. They offer you
greater control over how the test groups or subtests are run
and how their results are reported.
There are two ways to select a menu option:
•
•
Type the capitalized letter in the option (for example,
type r to select the RUN option).
Use the left- or right-arrow key to highlight the
option, and then press <ENTER>.
To select all the test groups, highlight ALL in the Select
menu and press <ENTER>. To select an individual test group,
either press the up- or down-arrow key to highlight the test
group and press the <SPACEBAR>, or highlight ONE in the
Select menu and press <ENTER>.
To reverse a test group selection, highlight the test group
and press the <SPACEBAR>. To clear all selected test groups,
select CLEAR ALL.
The KEY-HELP option displays a list of key controls available
for the selected option. The QUIT MENU option returns you to
the Main menu.
Whenever one of the eight options is selected, additional
choices become available.
The following subsections explain the menu options as
listed from left to right in the Main menu.
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-5
Subtest
Options Under Subtest
Most of the test groups consist of several subtests. Use
the SUBTEST option to select individual subtests within the test
group(s).
The OPTIONS option in the Subtest menu functions in the
same manner as the OPTIONS option in the Main menu. For
information on that option, see “Options” found later in this
section.
When you select SUBTEST, many of the same options as
those on the Main menu are displayed: RUN, SELECT,
OPTIONS, TEST LIMITS, ABOUT, KEY-HELP, and QUIT MENU.
Each of these options is explained in the following
subsections.
Run Under Subtest
RUN in the Subtest menu displays five options: ONE,
SELECTED, ALL, KEY-HELP, and QUIT MENU. If you select
ONE, only the highlighted subtest is run. If you choose
SELECTED, only the selected subtests are run. If you
select ALL, every subtest in the selected test group is run.
(The subtests are run in the order they are listed.)
The KEY-HELP option displays a list of available key controls.
The QUIT MENU option returns you to the previous menu.
Select Under Subtest
Test Limits Under Subtest
The TEST LIMITS option in the Subtest menu functions in the
same manner as the TEST LIMITS option in the Main menu. For
information on that option, see “Test Limits” found later in this
section.
About Under Subtest
The ABOUT option in the Subtest menu displays information
about the highlighted subtest, such as its limits and parameters
and how to set them.
Key-Help Under Subtest
The KEY-HELP option in the Subtest menu displays a list of
available key controls.
in the Subtest menu allows you to select individual subtests to tailor the testing process to your particular
needs. You can choose one or more subtests from the list.
When you choose SELECT, five options are displayed:
ALL, ONE, CLEAR ALL, KEY-HELP, and QUIT MENU.
Quit Menu Under Subtest
To select all the test groups, highlight ALL in the Select
menu and press <ENTER>. To select an individual subtest,
either highlight the subtest and press the
<SPACEBAR> or highlight ONE and press <ENTER>.
Options
SELECT
To reverse a subtest selection, highlight the subtest and
press the <SPACEBAR>. To clear all selected subtests, select
CLEAR ALL.
The KEY-HELP option displays a list of available key controls.
The QUIT MENU option returns you to the previous menu.
4-6
The QUIT MENU option in the Subtest menu returns you to the
Main menu.
Table 4-1 lists all of the possible values for each global
parameter of OPTIONS. A brief description of each
parameter follows the table. To select a parameter, press
the up- or down-arrow key. To change the values within
fields, use the left- or right-arrow key, the <SPACEBAR>
key, or the plus (+) and minus (–) keys. If the value
within a field is numeric, you can type in the number. (If
you make a mistake, type in zeros until the field is filled
with zeros and then start again.)
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 4-1. Option Parameters
Option Limit
Possible Values
NUMBER OF TIMES TO REPEAT
TEST(S)
0001 through 9999, or 0000, which loops indefinitely until you press the <CTRL>
and <BREAK> keys. The default is 1.
MAXIMUM ERRORS ALLOWED
0000
is 1.
PAUSE FOR USER RESPONSE
YES, NO
through 9999, where 0000 means that there is no error limit. The default
Allows you to decide whether tests will wait for user input. The default is YES
to wait for user input.
OUTPUT DEVICE FOR STATUS MESSAGES
DISPLAY, PRINTER, FILE
OUTPUT DEVICE FOR ERROR
MESSAGES
DISPLAY, PRINTER, FILE
If you have a printer attached to the computer, you can use it to print the status
messages, if any, that are generated when a test runs. (The printer must be
turned on and in the online mode to print.) If you select FILE, the status messages are printed to a file named result on the diagnostics diskette. The default
is DISPLAY.
If you have a printer attached to the computer, you can use it to print the error
messages, if any, that are generated when a test runs. (The printer must be
turned on and in the online mode to print.) If you select FILE, the error messages are printed to a file named result on the diagnostics diskette. (Make sure
the diskette is not write-protected.) The default is DISPLAY.
Number of Times to Repeat Test(s)
Pause for User Response
This parameter specifies the number of times the tests run
when you select RUN. To change the default, type in the
desired value. If you type 0 (zero), the test is run until you
press <CTRL><BREAK>.
If this parameter is set to YES, the diagnostics pauses when
one of the following occurs:
•
Your interaction is needed to verify the Video Test
Group screens, the Keyboard Test Group key functions, or other types of interaction such as inserting a
diskette.
•
The maximum error limit is reached.
Maximum Errors Allowed
This parameter specifies the maximum number of errors
that can occur before testing is suspended. The error
count begins from zero each time you run a subtest or test
group individually or each time you select ALL to run all of
them. To change the default, type in the desired value. If you
type 0 (zero), testing continues, regardless of the number of
errors found, until you press <CTRL><BREAK>.
To continue testing, press any key.
If the PAUSE parameter is set to NO, the diagnostics ignores
subtests that require your interaction; certain subtests can run
only if this option is set to YES because they require user
interaction. Set the PAUSE parameter to NO when you want to
bypass subtests that require user interaction—such as when
you run the diagnostics overnight.
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-7
Output Device for Status Messages
Ordinarily, all status messages appear only on the display. This parameter allows you to direct status messages
to either a printer or a file, in addition to the display. Use
the right-arrow key to select the option you want. If you
choose the PRINTER option, status messages print as they
occur. If you choose the FILE option, status messages are
written to a file named result. This file is automatically created on the diagnostics diskette when you run the
diagnostics. If the result file already exists on the diskette,
new status messages are added to it.
The result file is an ordinary American Standard Code for
Information Interchange (ASCII) text file. You can access the
result file through Windows Notepad by performing the following steps:
1.
Select QUIT MENU to exit the diagnostics and return
to the MS-DOS prompt.
2.
Remove the Dell Diagnostics Diskette from the
diskette drive.
3.
Use the <CTRL><ALT><DEL> key combination to
reboot the computer.
4.
If necessary, start your operating system.
5.
Insert the Dell Diagnostics Diskette into the diskette
drive.
6.
Double-click the Notepad icon. Then select OPEN
from the File menu.
7.
In the File Name text box, type a:\result and
press <ENTER>.
The contents of the file appear on the display.
You can also access the result file with the MS-DOS type
command:
1.
4-8
Select QUIT MENU to exit the diagnostics and return
to the operating system prompt.
2.
At the operating system prompt, type the following command and press <ENTER>:
type result
The contents of the file appear on the display.
After running particular diagnostic tests and viewing the
status messages generated by the tests in the result file,
you can delete the contents of the file so that it is empty for
the next set of messages generated. Otherwise, the next messages are added to the end of the previous ones in the file.
Output Device for Error Messages
Ordinarily, all error messages appear only on the display.
This parameter allows you to direct error messages to
either a printer or a file, in addition to the display. Use the
right-arrow key to select the option you want. If you
choose the PRINTER option, error messages print as they
occur. If you choose the FILE option, error messages are written to the result file used for status messages. This file is
automatically created on your diagnostics diskette when you
run the diagnostics. If the result file already exists on the diskette, new error messages are added to it.
The result file is an ordinary ASCII text file. You can access
and review the result file in Windows Notepad or with the
MS-DOS type command as described in the previous subsection, “Output Device for Status Messages.”
After running particular diagnostic tests and viewing the
error messages generated by the tests in the result file,
you can delete the contents of the file so that it is clear for the
next set of messages generated. Otherwise, the next messages are added to the end of the previous ones in the file.
Test Limits
NOTE: The diagnostics program sets default limits on all
tests. The only reason to change the defaults would be to
limit the amount of testing done. An exception is the
default limit for testing super video graphics array
(SVGA) modes. If you are testing an external monitor,
change the default to YES.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
The RAM Test Group, the Video Test Group, the Serial/
Infrared Ports Test Group, the Diskette Drives Test
Group, the Parallel Ports Test Group, the SCSI Devices
Test Group, and the Hard-Disk Drives (Non-SCSI) Test
Group allow you to designate limits. Whether you select
TEST LIMITS for a highlighted test group (from the Main
menu) or a subtest (from the Subtest menu), you set the limits
for all the subtests in that test group. When you select TEST
LIMITS, a new screen appears and the Key Help area lists
keys to use with the new screen.
How you change a value for the limits of a test group or
subtest depends on the type of parameter associated with
it. Different keys are used to change values for different
types of parameters. For example, memory address limits
specified for the RAM Test Group are changed by typing
in numbers over the digits of a given limit or by pressing
the plus (+) or minus (–) key to increase or decrease the
given limit. In contrast, to set limits for the Serial Ports
Test Group, use the <SPACEBAR> to toggle between YES
and NO.
After you are satisfied with the limits, return to the main
screen of the diagnostics by pressing the <ESC> key. The
values you selected under TEST LIMITS remain in effect until
you change them or exit the diagnostics. The values are reset
to their defaults when you restart the diagnostics.
About
in the Main menu displays information about the
highlighted test group, such as limits and parameters and
how to set them.
ABOUT
Key-Help
displays a list of key controls available for the
selected option.
KEY-HELP
Quit
Select QUIT from the Main menu to exit the diagnostics and
return to an MS-DOS prompt.
After you return to the operating system environment,
remove your diagnostics diskette from drive A and reboot the
computer by pressing <CTRL><ALT><DEL>.
CAUTION: It is important that you quit the diagnostic program correctly because the program
writes data to the computer’s memory that can
cause problems unless properly cleared.
Tests in the Dell Diagnostics
The diagnostics is organized by components into test groups
and subtests within each test group. Each subtest is designed
to detect any errors that may interfere with the normal operation of a specific device of the computer.
NOTE: Any subtest requiring hardware not listed in the
System Configuration area appears to run, but the subtest concludes with a status message stating Component
not available.
Table 4-2 lists the diagnostic test groups, their subtests,
and comments concerning their use.
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-9
Table 4-2. Dell Diagnostics Tests
Test Groups
Subtests
Description
RAM
Quick Test
Comprehensive Test
Secondary Cache Test
Tests the RAM.
System Set
CMOS Confidence Test
DMA Controller Test
Real-Time Clock Test
System Speaker Test
System Timers Test
Interrupt Controller Test
Tests the system board’s support chips,
DMA controller, computer timer,
NVRAM, speaker controller, and, if
appropriate, the external cache and the
thermal-control device.
Coprocessor Calculation Test
Coprocessor Duty Cycle Test
Coprocessor Error Exception Test
Tests the math coprocessor that is internal to the microprocessor.
PC Card Controller Test
Tests the PC Card controller on the
system board.
Video
Video Memory Test
Video Hardware Test
Text Mode Character Test
Text Mode Color Test
Text Mode Pages Test
Graphics Mode Test
Color Palettes Test
Solid Colors Test
Tests the display by checking various
aspects of video output.
Keyboard
Keyboard Controller Test
Keyboard Key Sequence Test
Keyboard Interactive Test
Stuck Key Test
Tests the keyboard by checking the keyboard controller and by finding keys that
stick or respond incorrectly.
Mouse
Mouse Test
Tests the electronic pointing device (integrated trackball, external serial or PS/2
mouse).
Diskette Drives
Change Line Test
Seek Test
Read Test
Write Test
Tests a drive that uses removable diskettes. Also tests the associated controlling devices and important parts of the
cabling.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
4-10
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 4-2. Dell Diagnostics Tests (Continued)
Test Groups
Subtests
Description
Hard-Disk Drives
(Non-SCSI)
Disk Controller Test
Forced Error-Correction-Code Test
Seek Test
Read Test
Write Test
Tests a drive that uses fixed, internal
disks. Also tests the associated controlling devices.
IDE CD ROM Drives
Drive Controller Test
Seek Test
Read Test
Audio Output Test
Eject Removable Media
Tests an IDE drive that uses removable CD media. Also tests the associated controlling devices.
Serial/Infrared Ports
Serial/Infrared Baud Rate Test
Serial/Infrared Interrupt Test
Serial/Infrared Internal Transmission Test
Tests the components through which
peripherals that use the serial or infrared
ports, such as communications devices,
send and receive data.
Serial External Transmission Test
Requires external loopback connector.
Parallel Ports
Parallel Internal Test
Parallel External Loopback Test
Parallel External Interrupt Test
Parallel Printer Pattern Test
Tests the components through which
peripherals that use the parallel port,
such as printers, send and receive data.
SCSI Devices
Internal Diagnostic Test
Seek Test
Read Test
Write Test
Audio Output Test
Eject Removable Media Test
Display Information Test
Tests the SCSI controller in the Dell Latitude XP/XPi Advanced Port Replicator
and all the SCSI devices attached to it.
Network Interface
Registers Test
Loopback Test
Shared RAM Test
Display Information Test
Tests the read and write access
capability of the network controller registers in the Dell Latitude XP/XPi
Advanced Port Replicator.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-11
Table 4-2. Dell Diagnostics Tests (Continued)
Test Groups
Subtests
Description
Audio
Software Reset Test
Compatibility ID Test
Interrupt Test
DMA Test
FIFO RAM Test
Initial Reset Status Test
Internal Register Test
Dual Channel Test
Tests the operation of the audio chip set.
FM Sound Playback Test
Analog Sound Playback Test
Record and Playback Test
Tests the record and playback ability of
the internal microphone and speakers.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
Error Messages
When you run a test group or subtest in the diagnostics,
error messages may result. These particular error messages are not covered in this guide because the errors that
generate these messages can be resolved only with a
technician’s assistance. Record the messages on a copy of
the Diagnostics Checklist found in Chapter 5, and read
that chapter for instructions on obtaining technical
assistance.
RAM Test Group
The RAM Test Group subtests check all the directly
addressable RAM. You should run the stand-alone RAM
Test program (ramtest.exe) from the MS-DOS prompt if, for
some reason, the diagnostics cannot load into memory.
4-12
The RAM Test program has switches so that you can set
both test limits and options for the subtests from the
MS-DOS prompt. The switches listed in Table 4-3 can be
added to the end of the ramtest command line.
The switches can be used in any order, but they must be
separated by a space.
For example, to run the RAM comprehensive subtest
10 times without pausing, stopping at a maximum of
20 errors, and outputting the results to a file named
ramtst.rpt, type the following command line at the MS-DOS
prompt and press <ENTER>:
ramtest -r10 -np -m20 -oframtst.rpt
To view the Help screen that lists all of the ramtest
command-line switches, type the following command at the
MS-DOS prompt and press <ENTER>:
ramtest?
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 4-3. RAM Test Switches
Switch
Description
–r number
Repeats the subtest this number of times. Valid numbers are 1 through 9999. A value of 0
causes the test to run until you press <CTRL><BREAK>. The default value is 1.
–m number
Stops the test if this number of errors occur. Valid numbers are 1 through 9999. A value of 0
causes the test to accept an unlimited number of errors. The default value is 0.
–s hexadecimal
memory address
Starts the test at this hexadecimal address. Valid hexadecimal values are 0 to the highest memory address. The default value is 0.
–e hexadecimal
memory address
Stops the test at this hexadecimal address. Valid hexadecimal values are 0 to the highest memory address. The default is the highest memory address.
–o[f filename,p]
Outputs the test report to a file (f) or a printer (p). If you output to a file, append the filename
after the f parameter. If you do not specify a filename when using the f parameter, the test report
is output to a file named result. If you output to the printer, the test file is output to LPT1.
–[q,c]
Runs the quick (q) or comprehensive (c) subtest. The comprehensive subtest is the default
value.
–np
Does not pause when an error occurs or a subtest finishes. Pause (p) is the default value.
Why Run a RAM Test?
Faulty memory can cause a variety of problems that may
not, at first glance, appear to be happening in RAM. If the
computer is displaying one or more of the following
symptoms, run both the subtests in the RAM Test Group
to verify that the memory is not at fault:
•
•
A program is not running as usual, or a proven piece
of software appears to malfunction and you confirm
that the software itself is not at fault. (You can confirm that the software is functioning properly by
moving it to another computer and running it there.)
The computer periodically locks up (becomes unusable and must be rebooted), especially at different
places and times in different programs.
Subtests
Two subtests are available for RAM: the Quick Test and
the Comprehensive Test. The Quick Test performs an
address check to determine whether the computer is
properly setting and clearing individual bits in RAM, and
whether the RAM read and write operations are affecting
more than one memory address location at a time. This
subtest checks all available RAM, including the
secondary cache. The Comprehensive Test also performs
an address check, as well as the following:
•
Data pattern checks, to look for RAM bits that are
stuck high or low, short-circuited data lines, and
some data pattern problems that are internal to the
memory chips
•
A parity check that verifies the ability of the memory
subsystem to detect errors
•
A refresh check, to verify that the dynamic RAM
(DRAM) is being recharged properly
System Set Test Group
The subtests in the System Set Test Group check the
computer’s basic system board components and verify
their related functions.
Why Run a System Set Test?
The System Set subtests double-check many system
board components, such as the computer’s I/O circuitry, that
are tested by other test groups or subtests in the diagnostics.
You should run the System Set Test Group if you are having
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-13
a problem and cannot isolate the failure or malfunction to a
particular system board component.
•
The computer halts in the middle of performing calculations or complex mathematical operations.
The System Set Test Group also verifies the proper operation of other computer components, such as the speaker,
that are not tested elsewhere in the diagnostics.
Subtests
The following symptoms usually suggest a problem with
a component or subassembly that warrants running a System Set subtest:
•
•
A program is not running as usual, or a proven piece
of software appears to malfunction and you confirm
that the software itself is not at fault. (You can confirm that the software is functioning properly by
moving it to another computer and running it there.)
•
A PC Card you previously accessed can no longer be
accessed.
•
The computer periodically locks up, especially at
different places and times in different programs.
•
Parity errors or page fault failures (any error message that contains the word parity or page fault) occur
at any time during operation. These errors are usually
accompanied by a reference to an address, which you
should record on a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist
found in Chapter 5.
•
Correcting errors in the system configuration information does not resolve a problem.
•
•
The computer’s clock/calendar stops.
The speaker no longer functions. The problem could
be a failure of the system timers as well as a failure
of the speaker itself. Run the System Timers Test,
followed by the System Speaker Test.
•
If a peripheral device appears to malfunction, run the
Interrupt Controllers Test. If the computer fails the
test, the problem lies with the interrupt controller; if
the computer passes, then the problem lies with the
peripheral device.
•
A spreadsheet program or other type of mathematical application runs abnormally slow, generates error
messages concerning calculations or operations, runs
incorrectly, or generates incorrect results; or a
proven piece of the program appears to malfunction
and you confirm that the software itself is not at
fault. (You can confirm that the software is not at
fault by moving the program to another computer
and running it there.)
4-14
The subtests in the System Set Test Group confirm the folowing computer functions:
CMOS Confidence Test
Checks the nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) for accessibility and reliability of data storage by performing a
data pattern check and verifying the uniqueness of
memory addresses.
•
DMA Controller Test
Tests the direct memory access (DMA) controller
and verifies the correct operation of its page and
channel registers by writing patterns to the registers.
•
Real-Time Clock Test
Confirms the functionality and accuracy of the computer’s real-time clock (RTC).
•
System Speaker Test
Checks the functionality of the speaker by generating eight tones.
•
System Timers Test
Checks the timers used by the microprocessor for
event counting, frequency generation, and other
functions. Only the functions that can be activated
by software are tested.
•
Interrupt Controller Test
Generates an interrupt on each interrupt request
(IRQ) line to verify that devices using that line can
communicate with the microprocessor and that the
interrupt controller sends the correct memory
addresses to the microprocessor.
•
Coprocessor Calculation Test
Checks the use of different types of numbers and the
math coprocessor’s ability to calculate correctly.
•
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Coprocessor Duty Cycle Test
Tests the math coprocessor’s ability to perform complex mathematical operations.
•
Coprocessor Error Exception Test
Verifies the math coprocessor’s ability to handle
errors and to send IRQs to the microprocessor.
•
Mode Color Test, the Color Palettes Test, and the
Solid Colors Test.
•
PC Card Controller Test
Checks the functionality of the PC Card controller
on the system board.
•
Thermal Control Test
Checks the functionality of the thermal-monitoring
and microprocessor speed-switching device on the
system board. This test does not apply to the Dell
Latitude LM.
Subtests
The eight subtests in the Video Test Group confirm the
following video functions:
•
Video Test Group
The subtests in the Video Test Group verify the proper
operation of the video controller and the video control
circuitry installed in the computer. These subtests check
for the correct operation of the readable registers in the
video circuitry and the controller. They write, read, and
verify data patterns in the cursor registers of the controller. The Video Test Group also provides additional
subtests to test the color features of the color display or
an external color monitor.
If the following symptoms still occur, run the appropriate
test(s) as follows:
•
•
•
If your display or external monitor shows a partially
formed or distorted image, run all of the subtests in the
Video Test Group.
If the alignment of text or images is off, regardless of
the program you are running, run the Text Mode
Character Test, Text Mode Pages Test, and the Graphics
Mode Test.
Video Memory Test
Checks the read/write capability of the video memory in various video modes
•
Video Hardware Test
Checks the cursor registers and the horizontal and
vertical retrace bit registers in the video controller
•
Text Mode Character Test
Checks the video subsystem’s ability to present data
in text modes
•
Text Mode Color Test
Checks the video subsystem’s ability to present color
in text modes
Why Run a Video Test?
Many of the symptoms that would prompt you to run a
subtest in the Video Test Group are obvious, because the
display is the visual component of the computer. Before
you run the Video Test Group or any of its subtests, you
should make sure that the problem is not occurring in the
software or caused by a hardware change.
If your display or external monitor malfunctions in
one mode but works fine in another (for example,
text is displayed correctly, but graphics are not), run
the Text Mode Character Test, Text Mode Color
Test, Text Mode Pages Test, and the Graphics Mode
Test.
•
Text Mode Pages Test
Checks the video subsystem’s ability to map and
present all available video pages on the screen, one
page at a time
•
Graphics Mode Test
Checks the video subsystem’s ability to present data
and color in graphics modes
•
Color Palettes Test
Checks the video subsystem’s ability to display all of
the available colors
•
Solid Colors Test
Checks the video subsystem’s ability to show
screens full of solid colors, and allows you to check
for missing color pixels
If the color on the display or external monitor is
intermittent or not displayed at all, run the Text
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-15
Many of these tests display characters or graphics on the
screen for you to verify. Samples of these screens are
shown in Appendix B, “Diagnostic Video Tests.”
Subtests
The four keyboard subtests confirm the following keyboard functions:
NOTE: The default limit for testing SVGA modes is NO. If
you are testing an external monitor, change the default to
YES.
•
Keyboard Test Group
•
The subtests in the Keyboard Test Group verify the correct operation of your keyboard and the keyboard
controller chip.
Confirms the ability of the keyboard controller chip
to communicate with the keyboard and confirms the
programming of the controller chip
•
When you press a key, the character represented by
that key appears repeatedly; the key seems to be
stuck. Run the Stuck Key Test.
•
When you press a key and the response is different
from the usual response or the response you anticipated, the key contact may be damaged. Run the
Keyboard Interactive Test.
•
When a key does not work at all, run all of the subtests in the Keyboard Test Group.
•
Keyboard Interactive Test
Checks the internal microcode of the keyboard and
the external interface of the keyboard controller chip
for a malfunctioning key
•
Stuck Key Test
Checks the internal microcode of the keyboard and
the external interface of the keyboard controller chip
for a repeating key signal
Mouse Test
The Mouse Test checks the functionality of the mouse
controller (which affects the ability to move the
trackball/mouse pointer around the screen with its
corresponding movement on your desk or pad) and the
operation of the trackball/mouse buttons.
Why Run the Mouse Test?
Touch pad or mouse problems are as likely to be caused
in RAM as they are to be caused by a faulty trackball or
mouse. Three sources of problems include the configuration of a program (which changes the function of the
trackball or mouse), memory-resident programs like
Sidekick or ProKey, and failure of a device driver (the
software that controls the functions of a trackball or
mouse). If these possibilities have been eliminated and
the following symptoms persist, run the Mouse Test:
•
4-16
Keyboard Key Sequence Test
Verifies that the keys on the keyboard function correctly when you press them in a predefined order
Why Run a Keyboard Test?
Keyboard problems are not always caused by the keyboard. For example, a complete lockup of the computer,
rendering the keyboard inoperable, is probably not caused
by a problem with the keyboard. There are two symptoms
that are likely to be keyboard-related. Sometimes, the configuration of a program changes the function of a key or key
combination. Similarly, key configuration programs like
ProKey can change a key’s function. Because these programs are memory resident, be sure to clear them out of the
computer’s memory before running a subtest in the Keyboard Test Group. (Clear them from memory by booting the
computer from the Dell Diagnostics Diskette.) When these
possibilities have been eliminated, and if the following
symptoms occur, you should run one or more of the subtests
in the Keyboard Test Group:
Keyboard Controller Test
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
When you press a trackball or mouse button, the
function of the button continues; the button seems to
be stuck.
•
If the response when you press a trackball or mouse
button is different from the usual response or the
response you anticipated, the button contact may be
damaged.
•
•
•
A trackball or mouse button does not work at all.
The four diskette drive subtests available in the Diskette
Drives Test Group confirm the following drive functions:
The cursor does not respond on the screen in accordance with the movements you make with the
trackball or external mouse.
Subtests
There are no subtests for the Mouse Test.
Diskette Drives Test Group
Subtests
•
Why Run a Diskette Drives Test?
Very often, a diskette drive problem may first appear to
be a diskette problem. A box of defective diskettes might
produce faulty-drive error messages. The test results can
be confusing, so you should run the subtests in the Diskette Drives Test Group more than once using diskettes
from different sources.
Another possible cause of diskette drive problems is
human error—typing a command in an incorrect form
(usually called a syntax error). Be sure you have entered the
command properly.
When the diskette and command syntax are eliminated as
causes, the following symptoms usually suggest a drive
problem and warrant running a subtest in the Diskette
Drives Test Group:
•
An error message appears on the screen stating that
the computer cannot read from or write to a diskette.
•
A diskette cannot be properly formatted, or format
error messages appear on the screen.
Change Line Test
Checks for bent pins on the diskette drive controller
and for defective lines on the diskette cable
•
Seek Test
Checks the drive’s ability to search for a specified
track on the diskette and to position the read/write
heads of the drive to all tracks
•
The subtests in the Diskette Drives Test Group allow you
to test diskette drives of all capacities.
NOTE: Before running the Diskette Drives Test Group,
install a CD-ROM drive in the options bay and attach the
diskette drive to the parallel connector on the back of the
computer. The subtests in the test group will fail if you do
not have a diskette drive attached to the parallel
connector.
Data on diskettes is corrupted or lost; these problems
may be intermittent.
Read Test
Positions the read/write heads at each cylinder of the
diskette and verifies that all tracks on the diskette
can be read correctly
•
Write Test
Positions the read/write heads at each cylinder of the
diskette and verifies that all tracks on the diskette
can be written to correctly
Hard-Disk Drives (Non-SCSI) Test
Group
The subtests in the Hard-Disk Drives (Non-SCSI) Test
Group check the functionality of up to two hard-disk
drives of any capacity. The subtests check the storage
capability of a drive as well as the hard-disk drive controller (which affects the ability to read from and write to
the drive).
Why Run a Hard-Disk Drives Test?
If you check your hard-disk drive to determine the
amount of available space, your operating system will
probably report problem areas. Problem areas on harddisk drives are common, because most hard-disk drives
have a small amount of space that is not usable. The
hard-disk drive keeps a record of this space so that the
computer will not attempt to use it. Identification of
unusable disk space, unless it is an unusually large
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-17
amount (over five percent of the possible total), should
not be regarded as a cause for testing the hard-disk drive.
These are the most common symptoms that might prompt
you to test the hard-disk drive:
•
•
The hard-disk drive fails during the boot routine.
Seek errors are reported by the operating system or
application programs.
•
An error message appears on the screen stating that
the computer cannot read from or write to the harddisk drive.
•
Data on the hard-disk drive is corrupted or lost; these
problems may be intermittent. Once saved by a program, files cannot be properly recalled.
Subtests
The five subtests in the Hard-Disk Drives (Non-SCSI)
Test Group confirm the following drive functions:
•
Disk Controller Test
Checks the internal microcode of the hard-disk drive
controller
•
Read Test
Positions the read/write heads at each cylinder of the
drive and verifies that all tracks on the drive can be
read correctly
•
NOTE: The Audio Output Test requires a CD with audio
tracks; all other subtests in this test group require a CD
with data tracks. If the CD-ROM drive contains a CD
that does not have the required data or audio tracks, the
subtest fails.
Why Run an IDE CD ROM Drives Test?
If you encounter a problem while using an application
program on a CD, the problem could result from the disc
or from the drive. When you encounter problems, first try
using a different CD. If the problem recurs, run the IDE
CD ROM Drives Test Group.
These are the most common symptoms that might prompt
you to test an IDE CD-ROM drive:
•
Seek errors are reported by the operating system or
application programs.
•
An error message appears on the screen stating that
the computer cannot read from an IDE CD-ROM
drive.
Seek Test
Checks the drive’s ability to search for a specified
track on the drive and to position the read/write
heads of the drive to all tracks
•
The subtests in the IDE CD ROM Drives Test Group
check the functionality of the integrated drive electronics
(IDE) CD-ROM drive. Before conducting an IDE CD
ROM test, insert into the CD-ROM drive a CD with
audio and data tracks (such as a multimedia CD).
Forced Error-Correction-Code Test
Checks the ability of the hard-disk drive to identify
and correct errors
•
IDE CD ROM Drives Test Group
Subtests
The five subtests in the IDE CD ROM Drives Test Group
confirm the following drive functions:
•
Causes the drive to execute its internal self-test.
•
Write Test
Positions the read/write heads at each cylinder of the
drive and verifies that all tracks on the drive can be
written to correctly
4-18
Drive Controller Test
Seek Test
Checks the drive’s ability to search for each block on
the device.
•
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Read Test
Positions the read heads at each block of the device
for reading data and verifies that all blocks on the
device can be read correctly.
•
Audio Output Test
Causes the drive to begin playing the first audio
track on an audio CD. (To determine if the test
passed, listen to the audio output of the drive.)
NOTE: The Audio Output Test does not run automatically as part of the IDE CD ROM Drives Test
Group; you must select the subtest individually.
•
Eject Removable Media
eliminate the software configuration as the cause of the
problem.
Although the following symptoms can be caused by
faulty peripherals or software errors, these symptoms
might also suggest a port problem:
•
If a peripheral works intermittently, or produces
intermittent errors, the port may be faulty.
•
If the computer displays an error message that is
related to the external device connected to a port, but
corrections to the device do not resolve the error, run
the appropriate subtest in the Serial/Infrared Ports
Test Group.
Checks the drive’s ability to eject the CD tray.
Serial/Infrared Ports Test Group
The subtests in the Serial/Infrared Ports Test Group
check the computer’s interface with external devices
(such as a serial mouse or a printer). The subtests in this test
group are not intended as a diagnostic test for the external
device itself.
Why Run a Serial/Infrared Ports Test?
It may not be immediately evident whether the port or the
external device is faulty. In both cases, the external
device (such as a serial mouse or a printer) might behave
erratically or not operate at all. Eliminate incorrect system configuration information settings, peripheral
malfunctions, and software errors as potential causes of
infrared (IR) port problems, before you run the subtests
in the Serial/Infrared Ports Test Group to check your
hardware.
If the diagnostics do not recognize the computer’s serial
or infrared port, check the SERIAL PORT or INFRARED
DATA PORT option in System Setup program to see if the port
has been disabled. For instructions, see “Serial Port,” “Infrared Data Port,” or “Parallel Mode” in Chapter 2. The subtests
in the Serial/Infrared Ports Test Group cannot test a port
unless it is enabled.
Another possible cause for errors is a problem with the
external device itself. Use the documentation that came with
the peripheral to troubleshoot it and confirm that it is working properly.
If the external device is not properly installed through
software, the device also may not function properly. Try
operating the device from different programs or through
the operating system. If it still does not work, you can
Subtests
The four subtests in the Serial/Infrared Ports Test Group
confirm the following port functions:
•
Serial/IR Baud Rate Test
Checks the baud rate generator in each serial communications chip against the computer’s clock
•
Serial/IR Interrupt Test
Checks the serial port’s ability to send IRQs to the
microprocessor
•
Serial/IR Internal Transmission Test
Checks several internal functions of the serial port
using the internal loopback mode of the serial communications chip
•
Serial External Transmission Test
If a loopback device is attached, checks the line control bits of the serial port and sends a test pattern at
several baud rates, checking the returned values
Parallel Ports Test Group
The subtests in the Parallel Ports Test Group check the
computer’s interface with external devices, such as a
printer, that are connected to the computer through the parallel port. The subtests in this test group are not intended as a
diagnostic test for the actual peripheral attached to each port.
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-19
Why Run a Parallel Ports Test?
Subtests
If the diagnostics does not recognize the computer’s parallel port, check the PARALLEL MODE system setup option
to see if the port has been disabled. For instructions, see “Parallel Mode” in Chapter 2. The subtests in the Parallel Ports
Test Group cannot test a port unless it is enabled.
The four subtests in the Parallel Ports Test Group confirm
the following port functions:
When a port is faulty, it may not be immediately evident
that the port, and not the device connected to the port, is
faulty. Instead, the peripheral (such as a printer) might
behave erratically or not operate at all. If the external
device is not properly installed through software, it also
may not function properly. Try operating the peripheral
from different programs or through the operating system.
If it still does not work, you can eliminate the software
setup as the cause of the problem.
•
Another possible cause for errors is a problem with the
external device itself. Use the documentation that came with
the peripheral to troubleshoot it and confirm that it is working properly. (Most printers have a self-test.)
•
After you eliminate incorrect system configuration information settings, peripheral malfunctions, and software
errors as potential causes of port problems, you can run
the subtests in the Parallel Ports Test Group to check your
hardware. Although the following symptoms can be
caused by faulty peripherals or software errors, they
might also suggest a port problem:
•
•
•
If a peripheral works intermittently, or produces
intermittent errors, the port may be faulty.
If the computer displays an error message that is
related to the external device connected to a port, but
corrections to the device do not resolve the error, run
the appropriate subtest in the Parallel Ports Test
Group.
If your software and the diagnostics do not recognize
that you have a parallel port, you should check the
PARALLEL MODE system setup option, and if necessary,
run the appropriate subtest in the Parallel Ports Test
Group.
4-20
•
Parallel Internal Test
Checks several internal functions of the parallel port
Parallel External Loopback Test
Tests the functionality of the control lines through an
external loopback connector, if an external loopback
connector is available
•
Parallel External Interrupt Test
Tests the parallel port’s ability to generate interrupts
from all possible sources, if an external loopback
connector is available
Parallel Printer Pattern Test
Tests whether the port(s) can retain data, print text
on a printer, and generate interrupts
SCSI Devices Test Group
The subtests in the SCSI Devices Test Group check the
functionality of the small computer system interface
(SCSI) controller in the Dell Latitude Advanced Port
Replicator and the SCSI devices attached to it.
NOTES: Before conducting these subtests on an external
SCSI CD-ROM drive, insert into the drive a CD with
audio and data tracks (such as a multimedia CD). The
Audio Output Test requires a CD with audio tracks; all
other subtests require a CD with data tracks.
If the external CD-ROM drive is empty, or if it contains a
CD that does not have the required data or audio tracks,
the subtest fails.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Why Run a SCSI Devices Test?
If you check your SCSI hard-disk drive to determine the
amount of available space, your operating system will
probably report problem areas. Problem areas on harddisk drives are common, because most hard-disk drives
have a small amount of space that is not usable. The harddisk drive keeps a record of this space so that your computer will not attempt to use it. Identification of unusable
disk space, unless it is an unusually large amount (over
five percent of the possible total), should not be regarded
as a cause for testing the hard-disk drive.
These are the most common symptoms that might prompt
you to test a SCSI device:
•
•
A SCSI hard-disk drive fails during the boot routine.
•
An error message appears on the screen stating that
the computer cannot read from or write to a SCSI
device.
•
Data on a SCSI device is corrupted or lost; these
problems may be intermittent. Once saved by a program, files cannot be properly recalled.
The seven subtests in the SCSI Devices Test Group confirm the following drive functions:
Internal Diagnostic Test
Causes the device to run its internal self-test.
•
Seek Test
Checks the device's ability to search for a specified
track on the device and to position its read/write
heads to all tracks.
•
Read Test
Positions the read/write heads at each block of the
device for reading data and verifies that all tracks on
the device can be read correctly.
•
Write Test
Positions the read/write heads at each block of the
device and verifies that all tracks on the device can
be written to correctly.
Audio Output Test
Causes the drive to begin playing the first audio
track on an audio CD. (To determine if the test
passed, listen to the audio output of the drive.)
NOTE: The Audio Output Test does not run automatically as part of the SCSI Devices Test Group; you
must select the subtest individually.
•
Eject Removable Media Test
Causes a CD-ROM drive to eject its CD, or a SCSI
tape drive to eject its tape cartridge.
•
Display Information Test
Displays a screen of information about the SCSI
controller in the replicator, the resources allocated to
the controller, and a list of target devices attached to
it.
Seek errors are reported by the operating system or
application programs.
Subtests
•
•
Network Interface Test Group
The subtests in the Network Interface Test Group verify
the basic operation of the network interface controller in
the Dell Latitude Advanced Port Replicator. They test the
controller’s internal functions, including read and write
access to its registers and internal transmit and receive
(loopback) capability.
Why Run a Network Interface Test?
Running a subtest in the Network Interface Test Group
helps diagnose problems that may occur while using a
Dell Latitude XPi computer in a network environment.
Most network failures are caused by one of the
following:
•
•
•
Poor network connections
•
Software configuration error
Failure in the network controller
Interrupt conflict (the controller trying to use the
same IRQ line as another device)
If a problem occurs while using the computer in a network environment, the network connection should be
inspected. If the connection is good, run the Network
Interface Test Group to determine if the network
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-21
interface controller is functioning. If the test group is run
in a loop, it can be used to detect intermittent failures.
Subtests
The four subtests in the Network Interface Test Group
confirm the following functions:
•
Registers Test
Checks the interrupt generation capability of the
controller by writing patterns to the writable registers in the controller and by reading the patterns back
to verify if they are accessible and able to retain data.
•
Loopback Test
Places the controller into its various loopback modes
and tests its ability to transmit and receive data.
Shared RAM Test
Performs a memory test on controllers with memorymapped shared RAM. On controllers with first-in
first-out (FIFO) shared RAM, writes a data pattern to
all locations and reads the pattern back to verify the
operation. Some controllers do not support shared
RAM tests.
•
the absence of an expected sound, first check the documentation that accompanied your operating system or
sound application to see if the sound features are correctly configured to work with the computer. The default
resource settings for the audio controller are:
•
•
•
Audio Test Group
The subtests in the Audio Test Group check the functions
of the audio controller and the computer’s recording and
playback features.
4-22
Port address: 220h
If you still do not hear sound when you expect to, run the
Audio Test Group.
NOTE: Before running the Audio Test Group, make sure
to enable the built-in speaker(s), and make sure that the
speaker volume has not been muted.
Subtests
The 11 subtests in the Audio Test Group confirm the following functions:
•
Software Reset Test
Checks for the presence of an active audio controller
in your system
•
Compatibility ID Test
Determines if the correct sound controller is installed
for your system
•
Interrupt Test
Checks to see if the audio controller is generating an
interrupt on the IRQ line configured for that
controller
•
DMA Test
Tests for the presence of a DMA channel on the system chip set, and determines if the DMA controller
and the audio controller can exchange signals
•
FIFO RAM Test
Checks the read/write capabilities and status of the
audio controller
Why Run an Audio Test
If you do not hear sounds from your built-in speakers
when you expect to, it is possible that your operating
system or sound application uses resource settings different from those of the audio controller in the computer. In
IRQ line: 5
If necessary, change the resource settings in your operating system or sound application to match these default
settings.
Display Information Test
Displays address and configuration information
about the network controller. This information
includes the network address used for communication on the local area network (LAN) and the
controller's IRQ level. You can make sure there is
not an interrupt conflict by verifying that the IRQ
level is not being used by another device connected
to the system.
DMA channel: 1
•
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Initial Reset Status Test
Verifies the reset values of the extended registers on
the audio controller
•
Internal Register Test
Dual Channel Test
The last three Audio subtests are interactive. In both the
FM Sound Playback Test and the Analog Sound Playback test, a series of musical tones is played through the
computer’s built-in speaker(s). A message on the display
asks if you hear the tones. Type y if you hear the tones;
otherwise, type n.
Confirms the presence of a second DMA channel on
the system chip set and determines if the DMA controller and audio controller can exchange signals on
that second DMA channel
The third interactive test, the Record and Playback Test,
checks the computer’s built-in microphone and speaker(s).
When prompted, press any key on the built-in keyboard
and say your name in a normal tone of voice.
FM Sound Playback Test
NOTE: After you press the key, you have only a few seconds to speak your name.
Writes test patterns to the internal registers of the
audio controller, then reads other registers to confirm
that the patterns are correctly interpreted
•
•
Tests whether the system can synthesize sounds and
play them through the built-in speakers
•
Analog Sound Playback Test
Tests whether the system can play sampled sounds
through the built-in speakers
•
Record and Playback Test
Checks the ability of the audio controller to generate
a sampled sound from signals received from the
built-in microphone
When prompted again, hit any key on the built-in keyboard to play back your voice through the built-in
speaker(s). Type y if you hear your voice; otherwise, type
n. If you press n, you are given another opportunity to
run the Record and Playback Test. When prompted, type
y if you want to try the test again (for instance, if you did
not speak quickly enough after pressing a key to begin
the test). Otherwise, press n.
Running the Dell Diagnostics
4-23
4-24
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Chapter 5
Getting Help
T
his chapter describes the tools Dell provides to help
you when there is a problem with the computer. It also
4.
tells you when and how to call Dell Computer Corporation for technical or customer assistance in the following
situations:
•
If you have a technical problem, read the next section, “Technical Assistance.”
•
If you are looking for information about a specific
subject or about Dell’s services, read “Help Tools”
found later in this chapter.
•
If you have a problem with your order, read “Problems With Your Order” found later in this chapter.
Technical Assistance
If you need assistance with a technical problem, perform
the following steps:
1.
Review the Dell Q&A.
Look for the Dell Q&A icon in the Dell Accessories
folder or group.
2.
Review the remaining documentation that accompanied your Dell computer.
To decide which document has the answers you
need, see the Preface.
3.
Run the Dell diagnostics.
See Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for
instructions on using the diagnostics.
Make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist (found
later in this chapter), and fill it out.
NOTE: Save the Diagnostics Checklist in this chapter as a master so you can use it to make copies as
needed.
On your Diagnostics Checklist, document any error
messages or beep codes as they occur so you can
inform the Dell technician of them. Describe what
was happening when the error occurred. Note the
steps you took to solve the problem.
5.
Call Dell for help with installation and troubleshooting procedures.
For instructions, see “Dell Contact Numbers” found
later in this chapter. When you call, you can ask to
speak to a technician, or you can use the AutoTech
service. For instructions on using AutoTech, see
“AutoTech Service” found later in this chapter.
NOTE: Have your express service code handy when
you call. The code helps Dell’s automated support
telephone system direct your call more efficiently.
For more information, see “Before You Call” found
later in this chapter.
Help Tools
Dell provides a number of tools to assist you. Table 5-1
lists subjects you may want information about, tasks you
may want to perform, and the tool(s) you can use for
help. Each tool is described later in this section.
Getting Help
5-1
Table 5-1. Help Tools
Subject or Task
Tool
BIOS revisions
TechConnect BBS
Frequently asked questions
Dell Q&A, Customer Technical Support
Information about Dell, its products, and its services
TechFax service, World Wide Web on the Internet
Installation instructions
Online System User’s Guide, Reference and Troubleshooting Guide, Customer Technical Support, AutoTech service
Interrupt maps
TechFax service
Ordering parts
Customer Technical Support, TechConnect BBS
Software update information
TechFax service
Technical notes on system compatibility and revisions
TechFax service
Technical training class information
TechFax service
Technical specifications
TechFax service, online System User’s Guide, Reference
and Troubleshooting Guide
Troubleshooting, step-by-step instructions
Reference and Troubleshooting Guide, Dell diagnostics,
Customer Technical Support, AutoTech service
Unresolved problems requiring assistance from a Dell
technician
Customer Technical Support, TechConnect BBS
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the online System User’s Guide.
Dell Q&A
Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Dell anticipates your questions by providing the Dell
Q&A, a Windows-based online file that answers questions that are often asked by Dell computer users. Look
for the Dell Q&A icon in the Dell Accessories folder or
group.
The Reference and Troubleshooting Guide includes information about system features, customizing the operation
of the computer, and diagnosing and troubleshooting
computer problems.
System User’s Guide
The Windows-based online System User’s Guide includes
information about traveling with your portable computer,
installing and using batteries, conserving battery power,
and attaching external devices to the computer. This document is installed on your hard-disk drive for easy
reference wherever you take the computer.
World Wide Web on the Internet
Dell can be accessed electronically on the Internet via a
World Wide Web site, a file transfer protocol (FTP) site,
and electronic mail (e-mail) using the following
addresses:
•
World Wide Web
http://www.dell.com/
•
Anonymous FTP
ftp.dell.com/
5-2
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Electronic Quote Service
When you call AutoTech, you use your touch-tone telephone to select the subjects that correspond to your
questions. You can even interrupt an AutoTech session
and continue the session later. The code number that the
AutoTech service gives you allows you to continue your
session where you ended it.
sales@dell.com
The information available through AutoTech includes:
Electronic Information Service
•
Specifications and prices for Dell computers currently on sale
•
Installation instructions for Dell computers and
peripherals
•
Answers to questions about the Microsoft Windows 95
and Microsoft Windows 3.x operating systems
•
Help in troubleshooting your Dell computer
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your
e-mail address as your password.
•
Electronic Support Service
support@dell.com
•
•
info@dell.com
Commercial Online Services
Dell can also be accessed electronically via commercial
online services, such as CompuServe®, PRODIGY®,
America Online, and the Microsoft Network, by using
the following addresses:
•
CompuServe
Type GO DELL.
•
PRODIGY
Select MANUFACTURER’S CORNER; then select DELL.
•
•
America Online
The AutoTech service is available 24 hours a day, seven
days a week. You can also access this service through
Customer Technical Support. For the telephone number
to call, see Table 5-3.
NOTE: AutoTech is not always available in all locations
outside the continental United States. Please call your
local Dell representative for information on availability.
Use the keyword DELL.
TechFax Service
Microsoft Network
Dell takes full advantage of fax technology to serve you
better. Twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week, you
can call the Dell TechFax line toll-free for all kinds of
technical information.
From the Edit menu, select GO TO, select OTHER
PLACES, and then type DELL.
Dell Diagnostics Program
Every Dell computer comes with Dell diagnostics that
can help you determine what is wrong with the computer
when it does not operate correctly. This program provides
valuable information that can help you fix the problem,
or can help Dell technicians should you need to call Dell.
See Chapter 4, “Running the Dell Diagnostics,” for
instructions on using the diagnostics. You can use this
diagnostic program to test major components or devices
in the computer, if it can boot.
AutoTech Service
Dell’s automated technical support service—AutoTech—
provides recorded answers to the questions most frequently asked by Dell customers.
Using a touch-tone phone, you can select from a full
directory of topics. The technical information you request
is sent within minutes to the fax number you designate.
TechFax information includes:
•
•
Interrupt maps and specifications.
•
News on updates for operating systems and application programs.
•
Descriptions of available technical training classes.
For Dell-certified technicians, TechFax offers information such as parts lists, drawings, and maintenance
and repair data.
Technical notes on system compatibility and
revisions.
Getting Help
5-3
For the TechFax telephone number, see Table 5-3.
NOTE: TechFax is not always available in all locations
outside the continental United States. Please call your
local Dell representative for information on availability.
Problems With Your Order
TechConnect BBS
If you have a problem with your order, such as missing
parts, wrong parts, or incorrect billing, contact Dell Computer Corporation for customer assistance. Have your
invoice or packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call, see Table 5-3.
Use your modem to access Dell’s TechConnect BBS
24 hours a day, seven days a week. The service is menudriven and fully interactive. The modem settings for the
BBS are 8 bit, no parity, 1 stop bit.
Product Information
You can use the BBS to do the following:
•
•
Send questions to a Dell technician
•
•
Order parts
•
Download updates to the Dell Directory
Request a follow-up call or leave a message for a
Dell technical support specialist
Download basic input/output system (BIOS) and
video driver upgrades
For the BBS telephone number, see Table 5-3.
NOTE: The Dell TechConnect BBS is not always available in all locations outside the continental United
States. Please call your local Dell representative for
information on availability.
If you need information about additional products available from Dell Computer Corporation, or if you would
like to place an order, a sales specialist will be glad to
help. For the telephone number to call, see Table 5-3.
Returning Items for Warranty
Repair or Credit
Prepare all items being returned, whether for repair or
credit, as follows:
1.
For the telephone number to call, see Table 5-3.
Automated Order-Status System
You can call this automated service to check on the status
of any Dell products that you have ordered. A recording
prompts you for the information needed to locate and
report on your order. For the telephone number to call,
see Table 5-3.
5-4
Call Dell to obtain a return material authorization number, and write it clearly and prominently
on the outside of the box and on the Diagnostics
Checklist.
2.
Include a copy of the invoice and a letter describing the reason for the return.
3.
Include a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist indicating the tests you have run and any error
messages reported by the Dell diagnostics.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
4.
Include any accessories that belong with the
item(s) being returned (power cables, software
diskettes, guides, and so on) if the return is for
credit.
Keep a record of your diagnostic and troubleshooting
activities by photocopying the Diagnostics Checklist in
Figure 5-1 and filling it out whenever you experience a
problem with the computer.
5.
Pack the equipment to be returned in the original
(or equivalent) packing materials.
NOTE: Be sure to save the checklist in Figure 5-1 as a
master, so you can use it to make copies as needed. The
checklist can also be accessed in the topic titled “Diagnostics Checklist” in the online System User’s Guide.
Include return shipping expenses. You are responsible for insuring any product returned, and you
assume the risk of loss during shipment to Dell Computer Corporation. Cash-on-delivery (C.O.D.)
packages are not accepted.
Returns that are missing any of the preceding requirements will be refused at our receiving dock and returned
to you.
Before You Call
Before you call Dell for technical assistance, convert
your service tag number into an express service code.
When prompted by Dell’s automated telephone system,
enter the unique code to route your call directly to the
proper support personnel.
If you did not convert your service tag number to an
express service code the first time you turned on the computer, do it before you call Dell for technical assistance.
Find the Express Service icon in the Dell Accessories
folder or program group. Double-click the icon and follow the directions.
If you need to call Dell Computer Corporation for assistance, you will be able to inform the support technician of
the actions you have taken to resolve the problem. If you
must return a piece of hardware to Dell, a technician will
assign a return material authorization number. Record the
number on the checklist, and include the filled-out checklist in the shipping box.
Dell’s technical support staff uses computer-based
diagnostics to provide fast, accurate answers to your
questions. When you call, the technical support staff
refers to records regarding your specific Dell computer to
better understand your particular question.
If possible, turn your system on before you call Dell for
technical assistance and call from a telephone at or near
the computer. You may be asked to type some commands
at the keyboard, relay detailed information during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at
the computer itself.
Make sure the computer’s user documentation is
available.
Getting Help
5-5
Diagnostics Checklist
Name: ______________________________________________________________Date: ____________________
Address: _____________________________________________________________Phone no.: _______________
Service tag (bar code on the bottom of the computer):__________________________________________________
Return material authorization number (if provided by Dell support technician):______________________________
Operating system and version: ____________________________________________________________________
Peripherals: ___________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
PC Cards: _____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
Are you connected to a network?
yes
no
Network, version, and network card: _______________________________________________________________
Programs and versions: __________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
See your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the system’s start-up files. If the computer is
connected to a printer, print each file. Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell.
Error message or beep code: ______________________________________________________________________
Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed: ___________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-1. Diagnostics Checklist
5-6
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Dell Contact Numbers
When you need to contact Dell, use the telephone numbers and codes provided in Tables 5-2 and 5-3. Table 5-2
provides the various codes required to make long-distance and international calls. Table 5-3 provides local
telephone numbers, area codes, and toll-free numbers, if
applicable, for each department or service available in
various countries around the world. If you are making a
direct-dialed call to a location outside of your local telephone service area, determine which codes to use (if any)
in Table 5-2 in addition to the local numbers provided in
Table 5-3. For example, to place an international call
from Paris, France to Bracknell, England, dial the international access code for France followed by the country
code for the U.K., the city code for Bracknell, and then
the local number as shown in the following illustration.
19
International
Access Code
(in France)
44
Country
Code
(for U.K.)
1344
City Code
(Bracknell)
________
Local
Number
To place a long-distance call within your own country,
use area codes instead of international access codes,
country codes, and city codes. For example, to call Paris,
France from Montpellier, France, dial the area code plus
the local number as shown in the following illustration.
16 1
Area Code
(for Paris from
outside Paris)
________
Local
Number
The codes required depend on where you are calling from
as well as the destination of your call; in addition, each
country has a different dialing protocol. If you need assistance in determining which codes to use, contact a local
or an international operator.
NOTE: Toll-free numbers are for use only within the
country for which they are listed. Area codes are most
often used to call long distance within your own country
(not internationally)--in other words, when your call
originates in the same country you are calling.
Getting Help
5-7
Table 5-2. International Dialing Codes
Country (City)
International
Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Australia (Sydney)
0011
61
2
Austria (Vienna)
900
43
1
Belgium (Brussels)
00
32
2
Canada (North York, Ontario)
011
—
Not required
Czech Republic (Prague)
00
42
2
Denmark (Horsholm)
009
45
Not required
Finland (Helsinki)
990
358
0
France (Paris) (Montpellier)
19
33
(1) (67)
Germany (Langen)
00
49
6103
Hong Kong
001
852
Not required
Ireland (Bray)
16
353
1
Italy (Milan)
00
39
2
Japan (Tokyo)
001
81
3
Korea (Seoul)
001
82
2
Luxembourg
00
—
—
Malaysia (Penang)
007
60
—
Mexico (Colonia Granada)
95
52
5
Netherlands (Amsterdam)
00
31
20
New Zealand
00
64
—
Norway (Lysaker)
095
47
Not required
Poland (Warsaw)
011
48
22
5-8
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 5-2. International Dialing Codes (Continued)
Country (City)
International
Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Singapore (Singapore)
005
65
Not required
South Africa (Johannesburg)
09/091
27
11
Spain (Madrid)
07
34
1
Sweden (Upplands Vasby)
009
46
8
Switzerland (Geneva)
00
41
22
U.K. (Bracknell)
010
44
1344
U.S. (Austin, Texas)
011
1
Not required
Getting Help
5-9
Table 5-3. Dell Contact Numbers
Area
Code
Local Number or
Toll-Free Number
Country
Department Name or Service
Australia
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-808-378
(Sydney)
Customer Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-819-339
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-808-312
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-818-341
Austria*
(Vienna)
Belgium*
(Brussels)
Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0224334100-0
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0660-8779
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 0800 14856
Customer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 91 99
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 0800 16884
SalesFax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 47 89
TechFax (International call to the Netherlands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .00 31 206829106
TechConnect BBS (International call to the Netherlands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .00 31 206866504
*
5-10
For technical assistance in this country after normal working hours, use one of the following numbers:
(353-1) 204 4008 or (353-1) 286 5908 (English only—the call is rerouted to the U.S.).
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 5-3. Dell Contact Numbers (Continued)
Area
Code
Local Number or
Toll-Free Number
Country
Department Name or Service
Canada
Automated Order-Status System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-433-9014
(North York, Ontario)
NOTE: Customers in
Canada call the
U.S. for access to
TechConnect BBS.
AutoTech (Automated technical support) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-247-9362
Customer Care (From outside Toronto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-387-5759
Customer Care (From within Toronto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758-2400
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-247-9349
Customer Account Services
(Credit Return Authorization Numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-387-5759
Sales (Direct sales—from outside Toronto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-387-5752
Sales (Direct sales—from within Toronto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758-2200
Sales (Software and peripherals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-667-7345
Sales (Federal government, education, and medical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-567-7542
Sales (Major accounts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-387-5755
TechConnect BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-8528
TechFax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-950-1329
Czech Republic*
(Prague)
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8728 221
Customer Service and Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879250
TechConnect BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66710274
*
For technical assistance in this country after normal working hours, use one of the following numbers:
(353-1) 204 4008 or (353-1) 286 5908 (English only—the call is rerouted to the U.S.).
Getting Help
5-11
Table 5-3. Dell Contact Numbers (Continued)
Area
Code
Local Number or
Toll-Free Number
Country
Department Name or Service
Denmark*
Customer Care, Technical Support, and Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 800 171 62
(Horsholm)
Finland*
(Helsinki)
France*
(Paris/Montpellier)
Customer Support and Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 0800-534 55
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 0800-33 55
Technical Support (Paris) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 62 68 90
67 06 62 86
Customer Care (Paris) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 62 69 39
Customer Care (Fax) (Paris) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 62 60 03
Customer Care (Fax) (Montpellier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .06 60 03
TechFax (Montpellier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 53 11
TechConnect BBS (Montpellier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 53 04
Sales (Major accounts) (Paris) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 62 69 00
Direct Sales (Paris) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 62 68 50
47 62 68 68
Corporate Sales (Paris) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 62 69 00
Germany*
(Langen)
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971-200
Customer Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971-500
TechConnect BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971-666
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971-460
Hong Kong
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 800 4107
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 800 4109
*
5-12
For technical assistance in this country after normal working hours, use one of the following numbers:
(353-1) 204 4008 or (353-1) 286 5908 (English only—the call is rerouted to the U.S.).
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 5-3. Dell Contact Numbers (Continued)
Area
Code
Local Number or
Toll-Free Number
Country
Department Name or Service
Ireland*
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-850-543-543
(Bray)
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-850-235-235
SalesFax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 2020
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 6848
TechConnect BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 4761
TechFax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 4044
Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 0500
Italy*
(Milan)
Japan
(Tokyo)
Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215.69.530
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215.69.444
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5466-3386
toll free: 0120-1984-39
Customer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-5466-4750
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-5466-6200
Korea
(Seoul)
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 080-200-3800
Customer Service and Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 080-200-3600
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 3122
Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 5600
Latin America
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-4093
NOTE: Customers in
Latin America call the
U.S. for sales and
technical assistance.
Customer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-3619
Fax (Technical Support and Customer Service) . . . . . . . . . 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-3883
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-4397
SalesFax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-4600
728-3772
*
For technical assistance in this country after normal working hours, use one of the following numbers:
(353-1) 204 4008 or (353-1) 286 5908 (English only—the call is rerouted to the U.S.).
Getting Help
5-13
Table 5-3. Dell Contact Numbers (Continued)
Area
Code
Local Number or
Toll-Free Number
Country
Department Name or Service
Luxembourg*
Customer Technical Support (Brussels, Belgium) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 0800 2109
NOTE: Customers in
Luxembourg call Belgium
for sales, customer
assistance, and technical
assistance, and they call
the Netherlands for the
SalesFax, TechFax, and
TechConnect BBS
services.
Customer Service (Brussels, Belgium) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 91 99
Malaysia
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 800 8298
(Penang)
Mexico
(Colonia Granada)
NOTE: Customers in
Mexico call the U.S. for
access to the Automated
Order-Status System and
AutoTech.
Sales (Brussels, Belgium) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 0800 16884
SalesFax (Brussels, Belgium) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 47 89
TechFax (Amsterdam, Netherlands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682 91 06
TechConnect BBS (Amsterdam, Netherlands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686 65 04
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 800 8202
Automated Order-Status System (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-0685
AutoTech (U.S.) (Automated technical support) . . . . . . . . . 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-0686
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228-7870
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228-7811
toll free: 91-800-900-37
toll free: 91-800-904-49
Customer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228-7878
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228-7800
Netherlands*
(Amsterdam)
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .toll free: 06-0996663
Direct Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .toll free: 06-0663
Direct SalesFax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 7171
Corporate Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 8818
Corporate SalesFax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686 8003
TechFax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 9106
TechConnect BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686 6504
*
5-14
For technical assistance in this country after normal working hours, use one of the following numbers:
(353-1) 204 4008 or (353-1) 286 5908 (English only—the call is rerouted to the U.S.).
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 5-3. Dell Contact Numbers (Continued)
Area
Code
Local Number or
Toll-Free Number
Country
Department Name or Service
New Zealand
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0800 446 255
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0800 441 567
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0800 441 566
Norway*
(Lysaker)
Poland*
(Warsaw)
Singapore
(Singapore)
South Africa
(Johannesburg)
Southeast Asian/
Pacific Countries
Customer Technical Support and Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-67 50 00
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67-125-711
Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620-7898
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620-4584
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 800 6011 051
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 800 6011 054
Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 011 447-7567
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 011 447-7549
Customer Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 4 810-4977
(excluding Australia,
Hong Kong, Japan,
Malaysia, New Zealand,
and Singapore—see
individual listings for
these countries)
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 4 810-4988
Spain*
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .902.100.130
(Madrid)
Customer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 10 80
TechConnect BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 33 53
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .902.100.185
Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 10 80
*
For technical assistance in this country after normal working hours, use one of the following numbers:
(353-1) 204 4008 or (353-1) 286 5908 (English only—the call is rerouted to the U.S.).
Getting Help
5-15
Table 5-3. Dell Contact Numbers (Continued)
Area
Code
Local Number or
Toll-Free Number
Country
Department Name or Service
Sweden*
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 05 199
(Upplands Vasby)
Customer Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 05 169
TechConnect BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 05 591
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 05 185
Switzerland*
(Geneva)
Technical Support (Swiss French) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .979 01 50
Technical Support (Swiss German) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .979 01 55
TechConnect BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .979 01 88
979 01 89
Customer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .979 01 50
U.K.*
(Bracknell)
Customer Technical Support
(Dell Dimension™ systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01344 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720109
Customer Technical Support (Other systems) . . . . . . . . . 01344 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723723
Customer Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01344 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720110
TechFax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01344 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723178
TechConnect BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01344 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723858
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01344 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720000
*
5-16
For technical assistance in this country after normal working hours, use one of the following numbers:
(353-1) 204 4008 or (353-1) 286 5908 (English only—the call is rerouted to the U.S.).
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table 5-3. Dell Contact Numbers (Continued)
Area
Code
Local Number or
Toll-Free Number
Country
Department Name or Service
U.S.
Automated Order-Status System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-433-9014
(Austin, Texas)
AutoTech (Automated technical support) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-247-9362
Customer Technical Support:
Dell Direct1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-247-9252
Major Accounts2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-247-9256
Dell Customer Service
(Credit Return Authorization Numbers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-624-9897
Dell Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-247-4618
DellWare® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-753-7201
DellWare FaxBack Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-1681
Fee-Based Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-433-9005
Sales (Catalogs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-426-5150
Spare Parts Sales:
Dell Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-274-1490
Major Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-357-3355
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-727-8320
TechFax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . toll free: 1-800-950-1329
TechConnect BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-8528
Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338-4400
*
For technical assistance in this country after normal working hours, use one of the following numbers:
(353-1) 204 4008 or (353-1) 286 5908 (English only—the call is rerouted to the U.S.).
1
Use this telephone number if your call is about a system purchased for home, personal, or small-business use.
2
Use this telephone number if you are calling for an established Dell national account (have your account number handy), if you
work for a governmental agency (local, state, or federal), or if you work for an educational or medical institution.
x
Getting Help
5-17
5-18
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix A
Technical Specifications
Table A-1. Technical Specifications
Microprocessor
Microprocessor type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intel Pentium microprocessor
Microprocessor speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 MHz
Bus architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCI
Internal cache memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 KB
External cache memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-KB pipelined-burst SRAM
Math coprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . internal to the microprocessor
Chip Set and Bus
System chip set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pico Power Vesuvius-LS Core Logic
Microprocessor data bus width . . . . . . . 64 bits
DRAM bus width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 bits
Address bus width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 bits
Flash EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 KB
Local bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 MHz
PCI bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 MHz
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the
online System User’s Guide.
Technical Specifications
A-1
Table A-1. Technical Specifications (Continued)
PC Card
PC Card controller
Texas Instruments PCI1130 CardBus controller
PC Card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . two (supports type I and type II cards in any combination; type III cards can be used only with type
I or type II cards)
Cards supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-V and 5-V
PC Card connector size. . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 pins
Data width (maximum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 bits
Memory
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDO memory1
Memory module sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . two
Memory module capacities . . . . . . . . . . 4-, 8-, and 16-MB fast-page mode
Standard RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 MB (EDO) on system board
Maximum RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 MB
Memory access time:
tRAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 ns
tCAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ns
BIOS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F000:0000
Connectors
Serial (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . one 9-pin connector; 16,550-compatible,
16-byte buffer
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . one 25-hole connector; unidirectional,
bidirectional, EPP 1.9, or ECP
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . one 15-hole connector
1
The system supports fast-page-mode memory modules for memory upgrades.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the
online System User’s Guide.
A-2
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table A-1. Technical Specifications (Continued)
Connectors (Continued)
PS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . one 6-pin mini-DIN (this connector does not
support more than one device at a time)
Infrared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . two ports compatible with IrDA Standard 1.1
(Fast IR)
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . microphone-in
line-in/audio-in
headphones/speakers
Advanced Port Replicator . . . . . . . . . . . 200-pin connector
Audio
Audio type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SoundBlasterPro-compatible 3.01 voice and
music functions
Audio controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESS 1888
ESS 690 wavetable music synthesizer
ESS 938 3D audio spatializer
Stereo conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 bit (analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog)
FM music synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-voice, 72-operator
Interfaces:
Internal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISA bus
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stereo line-in minijack
microphone-in minijack
headphones/speakers-out minijack
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . four 8-ohm speakers
Internal speaker amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . 1 W into 8 ohms stereo
Headphones amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 mW into 32 ohms stereo
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . volume can be controlled through key combinations, software application menus, or the Speaker
window in the Dell Control Center
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the
online System User’s Guide.
Technical Specifications
A-3
Table A-1. Technical Specifications (Continued)
Video
Video type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hardware-accelerated, 128-bit PCI
Video controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NeoMagic 2090
Video memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 MB
Display
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . active-matrix color (TFT)
Dimensions (active area):
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184.5 mm (7.26 inches)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246.0 mm (9.68 inches)
Diagonal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307.5 mm (12.1 inches)
Maximum resolution/colors . . . . . . . . . 800 x 600 pixels/65,536 colors
Response time (typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 ms
Operating angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0° (closed) to 180°
Dot pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.31 mm
Power consumption:
Panel (typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.69 W
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 W
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . brightness can be controlled through a key combination, the Display window in the Dell Control
Center, or the System Setup program
Keyboard
Number of keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 (U.S., Canada, Korea, Thailand, and locations
that use traditional Chinese); 86 (Europe);
87 (Japan)
Key travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.12 ± 0.02 inch)
Key spacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.25 mm (0.72 inch)
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the
online System User’s Guide.
A-4
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table A-1. Technical Specifications (Continued)
Battery
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lithium ion
Dimensions:
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.5 mm (0.81 inch)
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152.75 mm (6.01 inches)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78.5 mm (3.09 inches)
Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.41 kg (0.9 lb)
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4 VDC
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 WH
Charge time (approximate):2
Computer on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 hours
Computer off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 hours
Life span (approximate)2 . . . . . . . . . . . 400 discharge/charge cycles
Temperature range:
Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10° to 40°C (50° to 104°F)
Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10° to 40°C (50° to 104°F)
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F)
NiCad reserve battery:
Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 V
Operating time (approximate) . . . . 2 minutes (if computer is in battery swap mode);
40 days (if power is turned off)
2
Battery performance features such as charge time, operating time, and life span can vary
according to the conditions under which the computer and battery are used.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the
online System User’s Guide.
Technical Specifications
A-5
Table A-1. Technical Specifications (Continued)
AC Adapter
Input voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 to 135 VAC and 164 to 264 VAC
Input current (maximum) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 A and 0.6 A
Input frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 to 63 Hz
Output current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 A (continuous)
3.5 A (continuous)
Rated output voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5 VDC
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.94 mm (1.1 inches)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.42 mm (2.3 inches)
Depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133.35 mm (5.25 inches)
Weight (with cables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4 kg (0.9 lb)
Temperature range:
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –40° to 70°C (–40° to 158°F)
CD-ROM Drive 3
Disc size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 cm and 12 cm (no adapter required)
Data transfer rate:
Sustained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 KB/sec (mode 2 disc)
Burst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4 MB/sec (PIO mode 3)
Seek time:
Random . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 m/sec
Full-stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 m/sec
3
The CD-ROM drive in your computer may have different specifications.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the
online System User’s Guide.
A-6
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Table A-1. Technical Specifications (Continued)
CD-ROM Drive 3 (Continued)
Access time:
Random . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 m/sec
Full-stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 m/sec
Memory buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 KB
Physical (Computer)
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63.0 mm (2.48 inches)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280.9 mm (11.06 inches)
Depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233.5 mm (9.19 inches)
Weight
(with battery and hard-disk drive) . . . . 3.3 kg (7.3 lb)
Environmental (Computer)
Temperature:
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10° to 40°C (50° to 104°F)
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F)
Relative humidity (maximum):
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90% (noncondensing)
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95% (noncondensing)
Maximum vibration:
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.51 GRMS using a random-vibration spectrum
that simulates truck shipment
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 GRMS using a random-vibration spectrum that
simulates air/truck shipment
3
The CD-ROM drive in your computer may have different specifications.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the
online System User’s Guide.
Technical Specifications
A-7
Table A-1. Technical Specifications (Continued)
Environmental (Computer) (Continued)
Maximum shock:4
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152.4 cm/sec (60.0 inches/sec)
(less than or equal to a pulse width of 2 ms)
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203.2 cm/sec (80 inches/sec)
(less than or equal to a pulse width of 2 ms)
Altitude (maximum):
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3048 m (10,000 ft)
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,600 m (35,000 ft)
4
Measured with the hard-disk in head-park position.
NOTE: For the full name of an abbreviation or acronym used in this table, see the Glossary in the
online System User’s Guide.
A-8
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix B
Diagnostic Video Tests
T
he Video Test Group of the diskette-based diagnostics
consists of the following eight tests, each of which veri-
The following sections describe each of the tests in the
Video Test Group.
fies a particular video function or group of functions on
your built-in display or on an external monitor:
•
Video Memory Test — Checks the integrity of characters generated from data in the video memory
•
Video Hardware Test — Checks the functions of the
cursor register and the horizontal and vertical retrace
bit registers
•
Text Mode Character Test — Checks the video subsystem’s ability to present text mode data
•
Text Mode Color Test — Checks the video subsystem’s ability to present color in text modes
•
Text Mode Pages Test — Checks the video subsystem’s ability to map and present all available
video text pages on the display or monitor, one page
at a time
•
Graphics Mode Test — Checks the video subsystem’s ability to present graphics mode data and
colors
•
Color Palettes Test — Checks the video subsystem’s
ability to display all available colors
•
Solid Colors Test — Checks the video subsystem’s
ability to show screens full of solid colors and to display all pixels
All of these tests, except the Video Memory Test and the
Video Hardware Test, are interactive. These interactive
tests display images on the display or monitor and require
you to respond with the following steps:
1.
Examine a displayed image for correctness.
2.
If an image is correct, type y.
3.
If an image is incorrect, type n.
Video Memory Test
The Video Memory Test verifies the integrity of the
video memory on the system board. When a test is complete, a message indicates whether the video memory has
passed or failed the test. This test does not require any
interaction on your part.
Video Hardware Test
The Video Hardware Test verifies the operation of the
cursor registers and the horizontal and vertical retrace bit
registers. When a test is complete, a message indicates
whether these registers have passed or failed the test.
This test does not require any interaction on your part.
Text Mode Character Test
The Text Mode Character Test consists of a group of subtests that display printable characters and character
attributes. The subtests check character quality and the
ability of the display or monitor to show the characters
correctly. A prompt at the bottom of each screen asks you
to decide whether the display is satisfactory and to
respond by typing y or n.
If you respond affirmatively to each subtest, the Text
Mode Character Test passes. A negative response to any
subtest causes the test to fail.
Diagnostic Video Tests
B-1
The following subsections describe the subtests of the
Text Mode Character Test in the order in which they
appear.
Character Attributes Subtest (80 x 25)
The 80-column x 25-line character attributes subtest displays four lines of text that demonstrate normal-intensity
video, reverse video, intensified video, and blinking
video.
Character Set Subtest (80 x 25)
The 80-column x 25-line character set subtest displays all
256 characters in the American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) character set in 80-column
by 25-line text mode. Figure B-1 shows part of the character set subtest screen.
Character Attributes Subtest (40 x 25)
The 40-column x 25-line character attributes subtest
displays four lines of text, in 40-column by 25-line
(double-wide) text mode, that demonstrate normalintensity video, reverse video, intensified video, and
blinking video.
Character Set Subtest (40 x 25)
The 40-column x 25-line character set subtest displays all
256 characters in the ASCII character set in 40-column
by 25-line (double-wide) text mode. Figure B-2 shows
part of the 40-column x 25-line character set subtest
screen.
.
Figure B-2. 40-Column x 25-Line Character Set
Subtest Screen
Figure B-1. 80-Column x 25-Line Character Set
Subtest Screen
B-2
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Text Mode Color Test
Table B-1. Color Attributes
The Text Mode Color Test contains three subtests that
check the video subsystem’s ability to present color in
text modes. The following subsections describe these
subtests.
Row or
Column
Number
Foreground
Color
Background
Color
0
black
black
Color Attributes Subtest (80 x 25)
1
blue
blue
The 80-column x 25-line color attributes subtest displays
a pattern of 16 rows and 16 columns in 80-column by
25-line text mode. Each row has a hexadecimal number
in a unique foreground color and each column has a
unique background color. Where the same foreground
and background color intersect, the hexadecimal number
is not visible. Type y if each character is displayed correctly; otherwise, type n. Table B-1 indicates the color in
each of the rows and columns.
2
green
green
3
cyan
cyan
4
red
red
5
magenta
magenta
6
brown
brown
7
white
white
8
dark gray*
black
9
light blue*
blue
A
light green*
green
B
light cyan*
cyan
C
light red*
red
D
light magenta*
magenta
E
yellow*
brown
F
intense white*
white
*
These colors blink during the test.
Diagnostic Video Tests
B-3
Color Attributes Subtest (40 x 25)
320 x 200 Graphics Mode Screens
The 40-column x 25-line color attributes subtest is the
same as the previous subtest except that the characters
are displayed in 40-column by 25-line (double-wide) text
mode. Type y if each character is displayed correctly;
otherwise, type n.
The Graphics Mode Test displays two successive
320 x 200-pixel graphics mode screens. The first screen
displays three pyramids in red, green, and yellow. The
second screen displays three pyramids in magenta, cyan,
and white. Type y if all the pyramids are the correct colors; otherwise, type n.
Color Bars Subtest
The color bars subtest displays 16 bars in different colors
with background intensity enabled. Under each bar is the
name of the color that should be displayed. Type y if
each color bar is displayed correctly; otherwise, type n.
Text Mode Pages Test
The Text Mode Pages Test checks the video subsystem’s
ability to map and present all available video pages on
the display or monitor, one page at a time. The test displays eight successive screens, the first of which contains
21 lines of 77 zeros. The remaining seven screens are
identical to the first, except that each screen substitutes a
different numeral (1 through 7) for the zeros.
320 x 200 16-Color Graphics Mode
Screen
The 320- x 200-pixel 16-color graphics mode screen displays a series of Xs in 16 different colors with the name
of the color beneath each X. Type y if all the Xs are the
correct colors; otherwise, type n.
640 x 200 16-Color Graphics Mode
Screen
The 640- x 200-pixel 16-color graphics mode screen displays a series of hexagons in 16 different colors with the
name of the color beneath each hexagon. Type y if all the
hexagons are the correct colors; otherwise, type n.
Type y if all the rows of numbers on each screen are displayed correctly; otherwise, type n.
640 x 350 16-Color Graphics Mode
Screen
Graphics Mode Test
The 640 x 350-pixel 16-color graphics mode screen displays a series of octagons in 16 different colors with the
name of the color displayed beneath each octagon. Type
y if all the octagons are the correct colors; otherwise,
type n.
The Graphics Mode Test checks the video subsystem’s
ability to present graphics mode data and colors. This test
displays a number of different screens, each of which
allows you to check some aspect of graphics mode data
and colors. The following subsections describe the
Graphics Mode Test screens in the order in which they
appear.
B-4
640 x 480 2-Color Graphics Mode
Screen
The 640- x 480-pixel 2-color graphics mode screen displays three chess pieces. Type y if all the chess pieces are
identical and displayed correctly; otherwise, type n. Figure B-3 shows part of this screen.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
800 x 600 16-Color Graphics Mode
Screen
The 800- x 600-pixel 16-color graphics mode screen displays a series of pyramids in 16 different colors with the
name of the color beneath each pyramid. Type y if all the
pyramids appear to be correct; otherwise, type n.
800 x 600 256-Color Graphics Mode
Screen
The 800- x 600-pixel 256-color graphics mode screen
displays a series of squares with four colors in each
square. Type y if all the squares appear to be correct;
otherwise, type n.
1024 x 768 16-Color Graphics Mode
Screen (External Monitor)
Figure B-3. 640 x 480 2-Color Graphics Mode
Screen
640 x 480 16-Color Graphics Mode
Screen
The 640- x 480-pixel 16-color graphics mode screen displays a series of stars in 16 different colors with the name
of the color beneath each star. Type y if all the stars are
the correct colors; otherwise, type n.
320 x 200 256-Color Graphics Mode
Screen
The 320- x 200-pixel 256-color graphics mode screen
displays a series of squares in 256 different color hues
and intensities. Type y if all the squares are the correct
colors; otherwise, type n.
640 x 480 256-Color Graphics Mode
Screen
The 640- x 480-pixel 256-color graphics mode screen
displays a series of squares with two colors in each
square. Type y if all the squares appear to be correct;
otherwise, type n.
The 1024- x 768-pixel 16-color graphics mode screen
displays a series of hourglasses in 16 different colors with
the name of the color beneath each hourglass. Type y
if all the hourglasses appear to be correct; otherwise,
type n.
1024 x 768 256-Color Graphics Mode
Screen (External Monitor)
The 1024- x 768-pixel 256-color graphics mode screen
displays a series of asterisks with four colors in each
asterisk. Type y if all the asterisks appear to be correct;
otherwise, type n.
Color Palettes Test
The Color Palettes Test checks the video subsystem’s
ability to display all available colors. The test displays
two screens that allow you to check the quality of different shades of the basic colors and to test the ability of the
display or monitor to vary the intensity of these colors.
The first screen contains four sets of 64 squares, one for
gray and one for each of the three basic colors (red,
green, and blue). Each square contains a different shade
of its associated color, ranging from very light to very
dark. Type y if all the squares are the correct colors; otherwise, type n.
Diagnostic Video Tests
B-5
The second screen is the red/green/blue (RGB) color
combination screen. This screen allows you to test the
ability of the display or monitor to increase or decrease
the intensity of the three basic colors.
The RGB color combination screen displays an RGB box in
the top center of the screen with individual red, green, and
blue boxes beneath it. Underneath the individual color boxes
are three lines that show the intensity of each color. Type r,
g, or b to adjust the intensity of the corresponding color; then
press the right-arrow key to increase the color intensity, or
press the left-arrow key to decrease the intensity. Type y if all
the squares are the correct colors; otherwise, type n.
B-6
Solid Colors Test
The Solid Colors Test checks whether the video subsystem is displaying the correct colors. This test also lets
you check for missing pixels. When this test is running,
four screens appear sequentially—a red screen, a green
screen, a blue screen, and a white screen. Check each
screen for missing pixels, and verify that the correct color
is being displayed.
When the test is complete, a message asks if you are satisfied with the quality of the colors. Type y if all the pixels
were present and if the correct colors were displayed; otherwise, type n.
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix C
Regulatory Notices
A
ll regulatory notices for the computer are located on
the bottom of the computer.
Note that FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell Computer
Corporation could void your authority to operate this
equipment.
FCC Class B Notice (U.S. Only)
NOTE: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual,
may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to
Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference with
radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
•
•
•
Reorient the receiving antenna.
Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver.
Move the computer away from the receiver.
Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the
computer and the receiver are on different branch
circuits.
If necessary, consult a representative of Dell Computer
Corporation or an experienced radio/television technician
for additional suggestions. You may find the following
booklet helpful: FCC Interference Handbook, 1986,
available from the U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, DC 20402, Stock No. 004-000-00450-7.
A Notice About Shielded Cables: Use only shielded
cables for connecting peripherals to any Dell device
to reduce the possibility of interference with radio
and television reception. Using shielded cables
ensures that you maintain the appropriate FCC
certification for a Class B device of this product.
For parallel printers, a cable is available from Dell
Computer Corporation.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The following information is provided on the device or
devices covered in this document in compliance with
FCC regulations:
•
•
•
Product name: Dell Latitude XPi CD
Model number: PPS
Company name: Dell Computer Corporation
Regulatory Department
2214 W. Braker Lane
Austin, Texas 78758 USA
512-338-4400
Regulatory Notices
C-1
Modem Requirements
This equipment operates in compliance with Part 68 of
the FCC rules. In accordance with this regulation, the following requirements should be observed.
Type of Service
Your Dell notebook modem is designed to be used on
standard device telephone lines. The modem connects to
the telephone line by means of a standard jack called the
USOC RJ-11C. Connection to a telephone-companyprovided coin service (central-office-implemented
systems) is prohibited. Connection to party-line service is
subject to state tariffs.
Telephone Company Procedures
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with
the best service it can. To this end, the company may
need to occasionally make changes in its equipment,
operations, or procedures. If these changes might affect
your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow
you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you have any questions about your telephone line, such
as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it,
the telephone company will provide this information on
request.
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you
concerning the equipment that you have connected to
your telephone line. On request of the telephone company, provide the FCC registration number and the ringer
equivalence number (REN) of the equipment that is connected to your line; both of these items are listed on the
equipment label. The sum of all the RENs on your telephone line should be less than five to ensure proper
service from the telephone company. In some cases, a
sum of five may not be usable on a given line.
If Problems Arise
If your telephone equipment is not operating properly,
immediately disconnect the modem from the telephone
line, as it may harm the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, it may temporarily
C-2
discontinue service. When practical, it will notify you in
advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not
feasible, you will be notified as soon as possible. When
you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC.
If repairs are needed on your Dell notebook modem, they
should be performed by Dell Computer Corporation or an
authorized representative of Dell Computer Corporation.
To return products, you must call Dell customer service
at the toll-free number shown in Chapter 5, “Getting
Help,” to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number.
For more information on returning equipment, see the
“Total Satisfaction” Return Policy in Appendix D, “Warranties and Return Policy.”
Installation and Labeling
Your Dell notebook modem provides all the connections
necessary for proper operation. Connection to the telephone network should be made with standard modular
cords that connect to the jacks or the modem.
Load Number
The load number (LN) assigned to each terminal device
denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected
to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent
overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of
any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the LNs of all the devices does not
exceed 100. An alphabetic suffix is also specified in the
LN for the appropriate ringing type (A or B), if applicable. For example, LN = 20 A designates an LN of 20 and
an “A” type ringer.
IC Notice (Canada Only)
Most Dell computer systems (and other Dell digital apparatus) are classified by the Industry Canada (IC)
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard #3 (ICES-003)
as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification (Class A or B) applies to your computer (or other Dell
digital apparatus), examine all registration labels located
on the bottom or the back panel of your computer (or other
digital apparatus). A statement in the form of “IC Class A
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
ICES-3” or “IC Class B ICES-3” will be located on one of
these labels.
Note that Industry Canada regulations provide that
changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell
Computer Corporation could void your authority to operate this equipment.
EN 55022 Compliance (Czech
Republic Only)
This device belongs to category B devices as
described in EN 55022, unless it is specifically stated
that it is a category A device on the specification label.
The following applies to devices in category A of EN
55022 (radius of protection up to 30 meters). The user
of the device is obliged to take all steps necessary to
remove sources of interference to telecommunication
or other devices.
This Class B (or Class A, if so indicated on the registration label) digital apparatus meets the requirements
of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B (ou Classe A, si
ainsi indiqué sur l’étiquette d’enregistration) respecte
toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le Materiel
Brouilleur du Canada.
Ποκυδ νεν να τψποϖµ τιτκυ ποταε υϖεδενο, ε
σπαδ〈δοτδψΑποδλεΕΝ55↑22,σπαδ〈αυτοµατιχκψ
δοτδψΒποδλεΕΝ55022.Προζαζενζααζεν〈δο
τδψ Α (οχηρανν π〈σµο 30µ) ποδλε ΕΝ 55022 πλατ
ν〈σλεδυϕχ.
∆οϕδε↑λικρυεντελεκοµυνικανχηνεβο
ϕινψχηζαζεν,ϕευιϖατελποϖινενπροϖσττακοϖ〈
οπατεν, αβψ ρυεν οδστρανιλ.
Canadian Modem Requirements
The ICES label identifies certified equipment. This certification means the equipment meets certain
telecommunications network protective, operational, and
safety requirements. The Industry Canada regulations do
not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's
satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also
be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In
some cases, the company's inside wiring associated with
a single-line individual service may be extended by
means of a certified connector assembly (telephone
extension cord). Be aware that compliance with these
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in
some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an
authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by
the supplier (in this case, Dell Computer Corporation).
Any repairs or alterations made to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request that you disconnect the
equipment.
For your own protection, ensure that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and
internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly
important in rural areas.
CE Notice
Marking by the symbol
indicates compliance of
this Dell system to the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) directive of the European Community. Such
marking is indicative that this Dell system meets or
exceeds the following technical standards:
•
EN 55022 — “Limits and Methods of Measurement
of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information
Technology Equipment.”
NOTE: EN 55022 emissions requirements provide
for two classifications—Class A and Class B. If any
one of the registration labels (located on the bottom
or back panel of your computer, on card-mounting
brackets, or on the cards themselves) carries an
FCC Class A rating, the following warning applies
to your system.
WARNING: This is a Class A product. In a
domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user may
be required to take adequate measures.
Regulatory Notices
C-3
•
EN 50082-1 — “Electromagnetic compatibility—
Generic immunity standard Part 1: Residential,
commercial, and light industry.”
•
IEC 801-2 — “Electromagnetic compatibility for
industrial-process measurement and control equipment
Part 2: Electrostatic discharge requirements.” —
Severity level 3.
•
IEC 801-3 — “Electromagnetic compatibility for
industrial-process measurement and control equipment Part 3: Radiated electromagnetic field
requirements.” — Severity level 2.
•
•
IEC 801-4 — “Electromagnetic compatibility for
industrial-process measurement and control equipment Part 4: Electrical fast transient/burst
requirements.” — Severity level 2.
EN60950:1992 + Amd.1:1993 + Amd.2:1993 —
Safety of Information Technology Equipment
including Electrical Business Equipment.
A “Declaration of Conformity” in accordance with the
above standards has been made and is on file at Dell
Products Europe BV, Limerick, Ireland.
VCCI Notices (Japan only)
Most Dell computer systems are classified by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) as Class 2
information technology equipment (ITE). However, the
inclusion of certain options changes the rating of some
configurations to Class 1. To determine which classification applies to your computer system, examine the FCC
classification on the registration labels located on the bottom or the back panel of your compute. If any one of the
labels carries an FCC Class A designation, your entire
system is considered to be VCCI Class 1 ITE. If all labels
carry an FCC Class B identification number, your system
is considered to be VCCI Class 2 ITE.
Once you have determined your system's VCCI classification, read the appropriate VCCI notice. Note that VCCI
regulations provide that changes or modifications not
expressly approved by Dell Computer Corporation could
void your authority to operate this equipment.
Class 1 Notice
This equipment complies with the limits for a Class 1
digital device (devices used in commercial and/or industrial environments) and conforms to the standards for
information technology equipment that are set by the
Voluntary Control Council for Interference for preventing
radio frequency interference in commercial and/or industrial areas.
Consequently, when used in a residential area or in an
area adjacent to a residential area, this equipment may
cause radio interference with radio and television receivers or other communications equipment.
To ensure that such radio interference does not occur, it is
important to install and use this equipment in accordance
with the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Class 2 Notice
This equipment complies with the limits for a Class 2
digital device (devices used in or adjacent to a residential
environment) and conforms to the standards for information technology equipment that are set by the Voluntary
Control Council for Interference for preventing radio frequency interference in residential areas.
However, this equipment does generate, use, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction
manual, may cause interference with radio and television
reception. Therefore, it is important to adhere to the manufacturer's instructions for installing and using this
equipment.
Korean Regulatory Notice
To determine which classification (Class A or B) applies
to your computer system (or other Dell digital apparatus),
examine all registration labels located on the bottom or
the back panel of your computer (or other digital apparatus), on card-mounting brackets, and on the cards
themselves. If any one of the labels carries a Class A rating, your entire system is considered to be a Class A
digital device. If all labels carry the Class B rating, your
system is considered to be a Class B digital device.
NOTE: Class A devices are for business purposes. Class
B devices are for nonbusiness purposes.
C-4
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Class A Device
Please note that this device has been approved for business
purposes with regard to electromagnetic interference. If
you find that this device is not suitable for your use, you
may exchange it for a device that has been approved for
use in residential as well as business environments.
Class B Device
Please note that this device has been approved for nonbusiness purposes and may be used in any environment,
including residential areas.
Χα≥κοωιτε
οδ≥≠χζενιε
υρζ≠δζενια
οδ
σιεχι
ζασιλαϕ≠χεϕ
ναστπυϕεποωψϕχιυωτψχζκισζνυραζασιλαϕ≠χεγοζγνιαζδα
σιεχιοωεγο,κτ⌠ρεποωιννοβψυσψτυοωανεωποβλι↵υ
υρζ≠δζενια ι βψ ≥ατωο δοστπνε.
Ζνακβεζπιεχζε〉στωα∀Β∀ποτωιερδζαζγοδνουρζ≠δζενια ζ ωψµαγανιαµι βεζπιεχζε〉στωα υ↵ψτκοωανια
ζαωαρ-τψµι ω ΠΝ-93/Τ-42107 ι ΠΝ-89/Ε-06251.
Ποζοστα≥ε ινστρυκχ
κχϕ
ϕ ε β εζ
πιεχζε〉στωα
•
Νιεναλε↵ψυ↵ψωαωτψχζεκαδαπτεροωψχηλυβυσυωα κο≥κα οβωοδυ οχηροννεγο ζ ωτψχζκι. ϑε↵ελι
κονιεχζνεϕεστυ↵ψχιεπρζεδ≥υ↵αχζατοναλε↵ψυ↵ψ
πρζεδ≥υ↵αχζα 3−↵ψ≥οωεγο ζ πραωιδ≥οωο
πο≥≠χζονψµ πρζεωοδεµ οχηροννψµ.
•
Σψστεµκοµπυτεροωψναλε↵ψζαβεζπιεχζψπρζεδ
ναγ≥ψµι, χηωιλοωψµι ωζροσταµι λυβ σπαδκαµι
ναπιχια,
υ↵ψωαϕ≠χ
ελιµινατοραπρζεπι,
υρζ≠δζενια
δοπασοωυϕ≠χεγολυββεζζακ≥⌠χενιοωεγορ⌠δ≥α
ζασιλανια.
•
Ναλε↵ψυπεωνισι,αβψνιχνιελε↵α≥ονακαβλαχη
σψστεµυκοµπυτεροωεγο,οραζαβψκαβλενιεβψ≥ψ
υµιεσζχζονεωµιεϕσχυ,γδζιεµο↵ναβψ≥οβψνανιε
ναδεπτψωα λυβ ποτψκα σι ο νιε.
•
Νιεναλε↵ψροζλεωαναποϕ⌠ωανιιννψχηπ≥ψν⌠ωνα
σψστεµ κοµπυτεροωψ.
A protection mark “B” confirms that the equipment is in
compliance with the protection usage requirements of
standards PN–93/T–42107 and PN–89/E–06251.
•
Ωψµαγανια Πολ
ολσ
σκιεγο Χεντρυµ
Νιε ναλε↵ψ ωπψχηα ↵αδνψχη πρζεδµιοτ⌠ω δο
οτωορ⌠ω σψστεµυ κοµπυτεροωεγο, γδψ↵ µο↵ε το
σποωοδοωαπο↵αρλυβπορα↵ενιεπρ≠δεµ,ποπρζεζ
ζωαρχιε ελεµεντ⌠ω ωεωντρζνψχη.
•
Σψστεµκοµπυτεροωψποωινιενζναϕδοωασιζδαλα
οδγρζεϕνικ⌠ωιρ⌠δε≥ χιεπ≥α.Ποναδτο,νιεναλε↵ψ
βλοκοωα
οτωορ⌠ω
ωεντψλαχψϕνψχη.
Ναλε↵ψ
υνικα
κ≥αδζενια λυνψχη παπιερ⌠ω ποδ κοµπυτερ οραζ
υµιεσζχζανια κοµπυτερα ω χιασνψµ µιεϕσχυ βεζ
µο↵λιωοχι χψρκυλαχϕι ποωιετρζα ωοκ⌠≥ νιεγο.
Polish Center for Testing and
Certification Notice
All equipment that works together (computer, monitor,
printer, and so on) should have the same power supply
source.
The phasing conductor of the room’s electrical installation should have a reserve short-circuit protection device
in the form of a fuse with a nominal value no larger than
10 amperes (A).
All the equipment that works together must switch off
when the power supply cable plug is removed from the
power supply socket, which should be located near the
equipment and easily accessible.
Βαδα〉 ι Χερτψφικαχϕι
Ωσπ⌠≥πραχυϕ≠χεζεσοβ≠υρζ≠δζενια(κοµπυτερ,µονιτορ,
δρυκαρκα)ποωιννψβψζασιλανεζτεγοσαµεγορ⌠δ≥α.
Ινσταλαχϕα
ελεκτρψχζνα
ποµιεσζχζενια
ποωιννα
ζαωιερα
ωπρζεωοδζιεφαζοωψµρεζερωοω≠οχηρονπρζεδζωαρχιαµι,ωποσταχιβεζπιεχζνικαοωαρτοχι ζναµιονοωεϕ
νιε ωικσζεϕ νι↵ 10Α (αµπερ⌠ω).
Regulatory Notices
C-5
C-6
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix D
Warranties and Return Policy
Y
our Dell portable computer is covered by either a
three-year limited warranty or a one-year limited warranty. Please refer to your invoice to determine which
warranty applies to your system. The terms of the warranties (both for the U.S. and Canada) are provided in the
following sections.
standard price list are covered under this warranty; all
other monitors, keyboards, and mice (including those
sold through the DellWare program) are not covered.
Batteries for portable computers are covered only during
the initial one-year period of this warranty.
Coverage During Year One
Limited Three-Year Warranty
(U.S. Only)
Dell Computer Corporation (“Dell”) manufactures its
hardware products from parts and components that are
new or equivalent to new in accordance with industrystandard practices. Dell warrants that the hardware
products it manufactures will be free from defects in
materials and workmanship. The warranty term is three
years beginning on the date of invoice, as described in the
following text.
Damage due to shipping the products to you is covered
under this warranty. Otherwise, this warranty does not
cover damage due to external causes, including accident,
abuse, misuse, problems with electrical power, servicing
not authorized by Dell, usage not in accordance with
product instructions, failure to perform required preventive maintenance, and problems caused by use of parts
and components not supplied by Dell.
This warranty does not cover any items that are in one or
more of the following categories: software; sound cards;
speakers; external devices (except as specifically noted);
accessories or parts added to a Dell system after the system is shipped from Dell; accessories or parts added to a
Dell system through Dell’s system integration department; accessories or parts that are not installed in the Dell
factory; or DellWare products. Monitors, keyboards, and
mice that are Dell-branded or that are included on Dell’s
During the one-year period beginning on the invoice date,
Dell will repair or replace products covered under this limited warranty that are returned to Dell’s facility. To request
warranty service, you must call Dell’s Customer Technical
Support within the warranty period. Refer to Chapter 5,
“Getting Help,” to find the appropriate telephone number
for obtaining customer assistance. If warranty service is
required, Dell will issue a Return Material Authorization
Number. You must ship the products back to Dell in their
original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges,
and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Dell will ship the repaired or
replacement products to you freight prepaid if you use an
address in the continental U.S. Shipments to other locations will be made freight collect.
NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to Dell, back up
the data on the hard-disk drive(s) and any other storage
device(s) in the product(s). Remove any removable
media, such as diskettes, CDs, or PC Cards. Dell does
not accept liability for lost data or software.
Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell
uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and building
replacement products. If Dell repairs or replaces a product, its warranty term is not extended.
Coverage During Years Two and Three
During the second and third years of this limited warranty,
Dell will provide, on an exchange basis, replacement parts
Warranties and Return Policy
D-1
for the Dell hardware product(s) covered under this limited
warranty when a part requires replacement. You must
report each instance of hardware failure to Dell’s Customer
Technical Support in advance to obtain Dell’s concurrence
that a part should be replaced and to have Dell ship the
replacement part. Dell will ship parts using next-businessday delivery, shipping prepaid if you use an address in the
continental U.S. Shipments to other locations will be made
freight collect. Dell will include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning
the replaced part to Dell. Replacement parts are new or
reconditioned. Dell may provide replacement parts made
by various manufacturers when supplying parts to you.
The warranty term for a replacement part is the remainder
of the limited warranty term.
STATEMENT OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LIABILITY FOR
PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE OR
FOR LOST DATA OR SOFTWARE.
You will pay Dell for replacement parts if the replaced
part is not returned to Dell within 30 days after the date
the replacement part was shipped by Dell and for parts
used to repair systems not covered by this limited warranty. In these events, replacement parts will be priced at
Dell’s then-current standard prices. Payment for these
parts is due within 30 days from the date of invoice.
NOTE: If you chose one of the available warranty and
service options in place of the standard limited threeyear warranty described in the preceding text, the option
you chose will be listed on your invoice.
NOTE: You accept full responsibility for your software
and data. Dell is not required to advise or remind you of
appropriate backup and other procedures.
General
DELL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES
BEYOND THOSE STATED IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT. DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME STATES DO NOT
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
DELL’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS
AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN
THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT. THESE WARRANTIES GIVE YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND
YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH
VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
DELL DOES NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND
THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY
D-2
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION
OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE PRECEDING
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
These provisions apply to Dell’s U.S. limited three-year
warranty only. For provisions of any service contract
covering your system, refer to the separate service contract that you will receive.
Limited Three-Year Warranty
(Canada Only)
Dell Computer Corporation (“Dell”) manufactures its
hardware products from parts and components that are
new or equivalent to new in accordance with industrystandard practices. Dell warrants that the hardware
products it manufactures will be free from defects in
materials and workmanship. The warranty term is three
years beginning on the date of invoice, as described in the
following text. This warranty is transferrable with the
warranted products.
Damage due to shipping the products to you is covered
under this warranty. Otherwise, this warranty does not
cover damage due to external causes, including accident,
abuse, misuse, problems with electrical power, servicing
not authorized by Dell, usage not in accordance with
product instructions, failure to perform required preventive maintenance, and problems caused by use of parts
and components not supplied by Dell.
This warranty does not cover any items that are in one or
more of the following categories: software; sound cards;
speakers; external devices (except as specifically noted);
accessories or parts added to a Dell system after the system is shipped from Dell; accessories or parts added
to a Dell system through Dell’s system integration
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
department; accessories or parts that are not installed in
the Dell factory; or DellWare products. Monitors, keyboards, and mice that are Dell-branded or that are
included on Dell’s standard price list are covered under
this warranty; all other monitors, keyboards, and mice
(including those sold through the DellWare program) are
not covered. Batteries for portable computers are covered
only during the initial one-year period of this warranty.
Coverage During Year One
During the one-year period beginning on the invoice
date, Dell will repair or replace products covered under
this limited warranty that are returned to Dell’s facility.
To request warranty service, you must call Dell’s Customer Technical Support within the warranty period.
Refer to Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” to find the appropriate telephone number for obtaining customer assistance.
If warranty service is required, Dell will issue a Return
Material Authorization Number. You must ship the products back to Dell in their original or equivalent
packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during
shipment. Dell will ship the repaired or replacement
products to you freight prepaid if you use an address in
Canada. Shipments to other locations will be made
freight collect.
NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to Dell, back up
the data on the hard-disk drive(s) and any other storage
device(s) in the product(s). Remove any removable
media, such as diskettes, CDs, or PC Cards. Dell does
not accept liability for lost data or software.
Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell
uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and building
replacement products. If Dell repairs or replaces a product, its warranty term is not extended, except as may be
required by law.
Coverage During Years Two and Three
During the second and third years of this limited warranty, Dell will provide, on an exchange basis,
replacement parts for the Dell hardware product(s) covered under this limited warranty when a part requires
replacement. You must report each instance of hardware
failure to Dell’s Customer Technical Support in advance
to obtain Dell’s concurrence that a part should be
replaced and to have Dell ship the replacement part. Dell
will ship parts using next-business-day delivery, shipping
prepaid if you use an address in Canada. Shipments to
other locations will be made freight collect. Dell will
include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to
Dell. Replacement parts are new or reconditioned. Dell
may provide replacement parts made by various manufacturers when supplying parts to you. The warranty term
for a replacement part is the remainder of the limited
warranty term.
You will pay Dell for replacement parts if the replaced
part is not returned to Dell within 30 days after the date
the replacement part was shipped by Dell and for parts
used to repair systems not covered by this limited warranty. In these events, replacement parts will be priced at
Dell’s then-current standard prices. Payment for these
parts is due within 30 days from the date of invoice.
NOTE: You accept full responsibility for your software
and data. Dell is not required to advise or remind you of
appropriate backup and other procedures.
General
DELL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES
BEYOND THOSE STATED IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT. DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU.
DELL’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS
AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN
THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT. THESE WARRANTIES GIVE YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND
YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH
VARY FROM ONE JURISDICTION TO ANOTHER.
DELL DOES NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND
THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LIABILITY FOR
Warranties and Return Policy
D-3
PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE OR
FOR LOST DATA OR SOFTWARE.
other monitors, keyboards, and mice (including those
sold through the DellWare program) are not covered.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE PRECEDING EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
Dell will repair or replace products covered under this
limited warranty that are returned to Dell’s facility. To
request warranty service, you must call Dell’s Customer
Technical Support within the warranty period. Refer to
Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” to find the appropriate telephone number for obtaining customer assistance. If
warranty service is required, Dell will issue a Return
Material Authorization Number. You must ship the products back to Dell in their original or equivalent
packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during
shipment. Dell will ship the repaired or replacement
products to you freight prepaid if you use an address in
the continental U.S. Shipments to other locations will be
made freight collect.
These provisions apply to Dell’s Canadian limited threeyear warranty only. For provisions of any service contract
covering your system, refer to the separate service contract that you will receive.
NOTE: If you chose one of the available warranty and
service options in place of the standard limited threeyear warranty described in the preceding text, the option
you chose will be listed on your invoice.
Limited One-Year Warranty (U.S.
Only)
Dell Computer Corporation (“Dell”) manufactures its
hardware products from parts and components that are
new or equivalent to new in accordance with industrystandard practices. Dell warrants that the hardware
products it manufactures will be free from defects in
materials and workmanship. The warranty term is one
year beginning on the date of invoice, as described in the
following text.
Damage due to shipping the products to you is covered
under this warranty. Otherwise, this warranty does not
cover damage due to external causes, including accident,
abuse, misuse, problems with electrical power, servicing
not authorized by Dell, usage not in accordance with
product instructions, failure to perform required preventive maintenance, and problems caused by use of parts
and components not supplied by Dell.
This warranty does not cover any items that are in one or
more of the following categories: software; sound cards;
speakers; external devices (except as specifically noted);
accessories or parts added to a Dell system after the system is shipped from Dell; accessories or parts added to a
Dell system through Dell’s system integration department; accessories or parts that are not installed in the Dell
factory; or DellWare products. Monitors, keyboards, and
mice that are Dell-branded or that are included on Dell’s
standard price list are covered under this warranty; all
D-4
NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to Dell, back up
the data on the hard-disk drive(s) and any other storage
device(s) in the product(s). Remove any removable
media, such as diskettes, CDs, or PC Cards.
Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell
uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and building
replacement products. If Dell repairs or replaces a product, its warranty term is not extended.
DELL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES
BEYOND THOSE STATED IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT. DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME STATES DO NOT
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS
AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN
THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT. THESE WARRANTIES GIVE YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND
YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH
VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
DELL DOES NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND
THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LIABILITY FOR
PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE OR
FOR LOST DATA OR SOFTWARE.
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION
OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE PRECEDING
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
These provisions apply to Dell’s U.S. limited one-year
warranty only. For provisions of any service contract
covering your system, refer to the separate service contract that you will receive.
Limited One-Year Warranty (Canada Only)
Dell Computer Corporation (“Dell”) manufactures its
hardware products from parts and components that are
new or equivalent to new in accordance with industrystandard practices. Dell warrants that the hardware
products it manufactures will be free from defects in
materials and workmanship. The warranty term is one
year beginning on the date of invoice, as described in the
following text. This warranty is transferrable with the
warranted products.
Damage due to shipping the products to you is covered
under this warranty. Otherwise, this warranty does not
cover damage due to external causes, including accident,
abuse, misuse, problems with electrical power, servicing
not authorized by Dell, usage not in accordance with
product instructions, failure to perform required preventive maintenance, and problems caused by use of parts
and components not supplied by Dell.
This warranty does not cover any items that are in one or
more of the following categories: software; sound cards;
speakers; external devices (except as specifically noted);
accessories or parts added to a Dell system after the system is shipped from Dell; accessories or parts added to a
Dell system through Dell’s system integration department; accessories or parts that are not installed in the Dell
factory; or DellWare products. Monitors, keyboards, and
mice that are Dell-branded or that are included on Dell’s
standard price list are covered under this warranty; all
other monitors, keyboards, and mice (including those
sold through the DellWare program) are not covered.
Dell will repair or replace products covered under this
limited warranty that are returned to Dell’s facility. To
request warranty service, you must call Dell’s Customer
Technical Support within the warranty period. Refer to
Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” to find the appropriate telephone number for obtaining customer assistance. If
warranty service is required, Dell will issue a Return
Material Authorization Number. You must ship the products back to Dell in their original or equivalent
packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during
shipment. Dell will ship the repaired or replacement
products to you freight prepaid if you use an address in
Canada. Shipments to other locations will be made
freight collect.
NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to Dell, back up
the data on the hard-disk drive(s) and any other storage
device(s) in the product(s). Remove any removable
media, such as diskettes, CDs, or PC Cards.
Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell
uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and building
replacement products. If Dell repairs or replaces a product, its warranty term is not extended, except as may be
required by law.
DELL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES
BEYOND THOSE STATED IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT. DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU.
DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS
AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO
REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, AND REFUND AS SET
FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT. THESE
WARRANTIES GIVE YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL
RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER
RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM ONE JURISDICTION
TO ANOTHER.
Warranties and Return Policy
D-5
DELL DOES NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND
THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LIABILITY FOR
PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE OR
FOR LOST DATA OR SOFTWARE.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE PRECEDING EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
These provisions apply to Dell’s Canadian limited oneyear warranty only. For provisions of any on-site service
contract covering your system, refer to the separate onsite service contract that you will receive.
T
“ otal Satisfaction” Return Policy
(U.S. and Canada Only)
Dell up to 30 days from date of invoice for a refund of the
product purchase price if already paid. This refund will
not include any shipping and handling charges shown on
your invoice. If your organization bought the products
from Dell under a written agreement with Dell, there may
be different terms for the return of products under this
policy, based on your agreement with Dell. To return
products, you must call Dell Customer Service at the telephone number shown in Chapter 5, “Getting Help,” to
receive a Credit Return Authorization Number. You must
ship the products to Dell in their original packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept
the risk of loss or damage during shipment. You may
return software for refund or credit only if the sealed
package containing the diskette(s) or CD(s) is unopened.
Returned products must be in as-new condition, and all of
the manuals, diskette(s), CD(s), power cables, and other
items included with a product must be returned with it.
This “Total Satisfaction” Return Policy does not apply to
DellWare products, which may be returned under DellWare’s current return policy.
If you are an end-user customer who bought products
directly from a Dell company, you may return them to
D-6
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Index
A
beep codes, 3-11
See also error messages
AC adapter connector, 1-2
BIOS
upgrade, 2-6
version, 2-5
administrator password
assigning or changing, 2-5
Advanced Port Replicator, 1-2, 1-3
alternating current. See AC
asset tag code
assigning or changing, 2-14
viewing, 2-5
Asset Tag utility, 2-14
assistance
technical, 5-1
telephone numbers, 5-7
warranty repair or credit, 5-4
audio controller, 1-3
audio functions
troubleshooting, 3-30
audio jacks, 1-2
Audio Test Group
Dell diagnostics, 4-22
AutoTech service, 5-3
B
basic input/output system. See BIOS
battery, 1-3
boot device
selecting, 2-6
boot routine
about, 3-1
booting the computer, 2-6
bulletin board service. See TechConnect BBS
C
cables
shielded cables, C-1
troubleshooting, 3-2
cache memory, 1-3
calling Dell, 5-7
card. See PC Cards
cautions, x
CD-ROM drive
about, 1-2
troubleshooting, 3-23
central processing unit (CPU). See microprocessor
character attributes test. See video tests, Text Mode
Character Test
Index
1
character set test. See video tests, Text Mode
Character Test
color attributes test. See video tests, Text Mode
Color Test
color bars test. See video tests, Text Mode Color Test
Color Palettes Test, B-5
computer
customizing features, 2-1
features, 1-2
technical specifications, A-1
traveling with, v
connectors
location, 1-2
troubleshooting, 3-2
conventional memory
address map, 3-16
cords. See cables
CPU. See microprocessor
customizing computer features, 2-1
Dell diagnostics (continued)
Keyboard Test Group, 4-16
main screen, 4-4
Mouse Test Group, 4-16
Network Interface Test Group, 4-21
Parallel Ports Test Group, 4-19
quitting, 4-9
RAM Test Group, 4-12
SCSI Devices Test Group, 4-20
starting, 4-2
system configuration information, 4-4
System Set Test Group, 4-13
tests, 4-9
using, 4-3
Video Test Group, 4-15
video tests, B-1
when to use, 4-1
Dell Q&A, 5-2
device drivers, 3-15
diagnosing problems, 5-1
diagnostic program. See Dell diagnostics
Diagnostics Checklist, 5-6
disk. See diskette drive, hard-disk drives, CD-ROM drive
D
date
setting, 2-6
Date option
System Setup program, 2-6
Dell Control Center, 2-1
Dell diagnostics
about, 4-1
Audio Test Group, 4-22
before starting, 4-2
Diagnostics Menu, 4-2
Diskette Drives Test Group, 4-17
error messages, 4-12
features, 4-1
Hard-Disk Drives (Non-SCSI Test Group), 4-17
IDE CD ROM Drives Test Group, 4-18
2
diskette drive
failure during POST, 3-22
location, 1-1
testing, 4-17
type, 2-7
Diskette Drives Test Group
Dell diagnostics, 4-17
display
about, 1-2
adjusting, 2-6
location, 1-1
power management, 2-7
troubleshooting, 3-26
dropped or damaged computer, 3-19
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
E
ECP-compatible devices, 2-9
error messages
beep codes, 3-11
Dell diagnostics, 4-12
system error messages, 3-4, 3-5
table, 3-4, 3-5
ESD, viii
expanded memory, 3-14
Extended Capabilities Port. See ECP
extended memory, 3-14
external cache, 1-3
F
failures
basic checks, 3-1
technical assistance, 5-1
troubleshooting, 3-18
fixed disk. See hard-disk drive
fixing problems, 5-1
floppy drive. See diskette drive
hard-disk drives
about, 1-2
capacity, 2-8
interchanging, 1-4
power management, 2-6
S2D partition, 2-14
testing, 4-17
troubleshooting, 3-23
Hard-Disk Drives (Non-SCSI) Test Group
Dell diagnostics, 4-17
help
from Dell Computer Corporation, 5-1
help tools
AutoTech service, 5-3
Dell diagnostics program, 4-1, 5-3
Dell Q&A, 5-2
TechConnect BBS, 5-4
TechFax service, 5-3
user’s documentation, 5-2
I
I/O address map, 3-17
I/O connectors, 1-2
I/O functions, 3-28
I/O panel, 1-2
G
IDE CD ROM Drives Test Group
Dell diagnostics, 4-18
getting help, 5-1
indicator panel, 1-1
graphics mode screens, B-4
infrared ports
about, 1-3
location, 1-1, 1-2
mapping, 2-7
troubleshooting, 3-29
Graphics Mode Test, B-4
grounding procedure, vi
input/output. See I/O
H
interrupt request. See IRQ
hard drive. See hard-disk drives
Index
3
interrupts
avoiding assignment conflicts, 3-15
IRQ lines, 3-16
memory (continued)
memory modules, 1-2
RAM Test Group in Dell diagnostics, 4-12
system memory, 1-2, 2-12
memory modules
capacities supported, 1-2
reseating, 3-18, 3-22
K
keyboard
checking external keyboard during POST, 3-24
Keyboard Test Group in Dell diagnostics, 4-16
keyboard clicks, 2-8
Keyboard Test Group
Dell diagnostics, 4-16
Key-Help
option in Dell diagnostics, 4-9
keypad
checking external keypad during POST, 3-24
L
menu options
Dell diagnostics, 4-5
messages
beep codes, 3-4
Dell diagnostics, 4-1, 4-12
error messages, 2-1, 3-14
system messages, 3-4
System Setup messages, 2-3
microphone, 1-1
microprocessor
boot speed, 2-6
slowing the microprocessor, 2-11
speed, 1-2, 2-9
monitor (external)
errors during POST, 3-27
line-in/audio-in connectors, 1-1
lithium ion battery, 1-3
monitor connector, 1-3
Mouse Test
Dell diagnostics, 4-16
M
math coprocessor
testing, 4-14
memory
about, 3-16
address maps, 3-16, 3-17
conventional, 3-14
expanded, 3-14
extended, 3-14
failure during POST, 3-25
I/O map, 3-17
maximum configuration, 1-2
4
N
Network Interface Test Group
Dell diagnostics, 4-21
nonvolatile random-access memory. See NVRAM
notational conventions, x
notes, x
NVRAM, 2-1, 3-10
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
O
Options
option in Dell diagnostics, 4-6
options, 1-4
P
parallel port
disabling, 2-9
mapping, 2-9
troubleshooting, 3-27
Parallel Ports Test Group
in Dell diagnostics, 4-19
power failure (continued)
cable connections, 3-2
partial, 3-21
troubleshooting, 3-19
power management
display, 2-7
enabling and disabling options, 2-9
hard-disk drive, 2-6
microprocessor, 2-11
PC Cards, 2-8
serial port, 2-11
suspend mode, 2-12
suspend-to-disk mode, 2-10, 2-14
power switch, 1-2
power-on self test. See POST
parallel printer
troubleshooting, 3-28
primary password
assigning or changing, 2-10
passwords
administrator password, 2-5
primary password, 2-10
problems
help tools, 5-1
with your order, 5-4
PC Card slot, 1-2
processor. See microprocessor
PC Cards
about, 1-3
configuring, 2-14
sockets, 2-8
product information, 5-4
PCMCIA cards. See PC Cards
program diskette sets, 1-3
program. See system utilities
PS/2 connector, 1-3
Personal System/2. See PS/2
ports. See parallel port, serial port, infrared ports
POST
CD-ROM drive check, 3-23
diskette drive check, 3-22
external keyboard/keypad check, 3-24
external monitor check, 3-27
hard-disk drive check, 3-23
memory check, 3-25
power failure
AC power, 3-21
battery power, 3-21
Q
Quit
option in Dell diagnostics, 4-9
R
RAM count failure during POST, 3-25
RAM Test Group
in Dell diagnostics, 4-12
Index
5
random-access memory. See RAM
regulatory notices, C-1
returns, 5-4
Run
option in Dell diagnostics, 4-5
S
safety instructions
ESD prevention, viii
general, v
working inside your computer, vi
SCSI Devices Test Group
Dell diagnostics, 4-20
security
administrator password, 2-5
asset tag code, 2-5
boot device, 2-6
cable slot, 1-2
primary password, 2-10
software
device drivers, 3-15
error messages, 3-14
included with your computer, 1-3
installing and configuring, 3-13
memory resident programs, 3-14
problems, 3-13
program conflicts, 3-15
start-up files, 3-14
system utilities, 2-13
troubleshooting errors, 3-13
using, 3-14
virus scan, 3-13
Solid Colors Test, B-6
sound ports, 1-1
speakers
keyboard clicks, 2-8
location, 1-1, 1-2
volume, 2-11
specifications
technical, A-1
security cable slot, 1-2
standby mode
deactivating on alarm ring, 2-10
Select
option in Dell diagnostics, 4-5
Subtest
option in Dell diagnostics, 4-6
serial devices
troubleshooting, 3-29
support
technical, 5-1
serial port
disabling, 2-11
mapping, 2-11
troubleshooting, 3-27
suspend mode
activating, 2-12
deactivating on alarm or modem ring, 2-10
Serial/Infrared Ports Test Group
Dell diagnostics, 4-19
service, 5-1
service tag, 2-11
suspend-to-disk mode, 2-10
Suspend-to-Disk utility, 2-14, 2-15
system
features, 1-2
specifications, A-1
setup program. See System Setup program
shielded cables, C-1
6
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
system configuration information
about, 2-1
confirming with Dell diagnostics, 4-4
viewing, 2-4
system memory, 2-12
system messages, 3-4
System Set Test Group
Dell diagnostics, 4-13
System Setup program
about, 2-1
AC option, 2-5
Admin Password option, 2-5
Alarm Resume option, 2-5
Asset Tag option, 2-5
Battery option, 2-5
Battery Status option, 2-5
BIOS version option, 2-5
Boot Sequence option, 2-6
Boot Speed option, 2-6
Brightness option, 2-6
Date option, 2-6
Disk Time-Out option, 2-6
Diskette Drive A option, 2-7
Display Close option, 2-7
Display Time-Out option, 2-7
Expansion Device option, 2-7
External Cache option, 2-7
help messages, 2-3
Infrared Data Port option, 2-7
Integrated Trackball option, 2-8
IntelliSpin option, 2-8
Internal Hard Drive, 2-8
Keyboard Click option, 2-8
Lower PC Card Socket option, 2-8
Microprocessor option, 2-9
Monitor Toggle option, 2-9
options, 2-5
Parallel Mode option, 2-9
Power Management option, 2-9
Primary Password option, 2-10
Replicator Network option, 2-10
System Setup program (continued)
Replicator SCSI option, 2-10
Ring Event Resume option, 2-10
Ring Speed option, 2-10
S2D Time-Out option, 2-10
screens, 2-4
Serial Port option, 2-11
Service Tag option, 2-11
Smart CPU Mode option, 2-11
Speaker Volume option, 2-11
Suspend Time-Out option, 2-12
System Memory option, 2-12
System Switch option, 2-12
Time option, 2-12
Upper PC Card Socket option, 2-8
using, 2-1
Video Memory option, 2-13
system utilities
about, 2-13
Asset Tag utility, 2-14
Suspend-to-Disk utility, 2-14
T
TechConnect BBS, 5-4
TechFax service, 5-3
technical assistance
obtaining, 5-1
warranty repair or credit, 5-4
technical specifications, A-1
terminate-and-stay-resident. See TSR
Test Limits
option in Dell diagnostics, 4-8
Text Mode Character Test, B-1
Text Mode Color Test, B-3
Text Mode Pages Test, B-4
Index
7
time
setting, 2-12
trackball
enabling or disabling, 2-8
location, 1-1
testing, 4-16
troubleshooting
about, 3-1
AC power failure, 3-20
audible signs of problems, 3-3
audio functions, 3-30
basic problems, 3-1
battery power failure, 3-21
beep codes, 3-4
CD-ROM drive, 3-23
checking connections, 3-2
Diagnostics Checklist, 5-6
diskette drive failure during POST, 3-22
display failure, 3-26
dropped or damaged computer, 3-19
external keyboard/keypad, 3-24
external keypad, 3-24
external monitor, 3-27
failure during RAM count, 3-25
hard-disk drive failure during POST, 3-23
I/O functions, 3-28
infrared ports, 3-29
IRQ conflicts, 3-15
messages, 3-4
monitor, 3-27
8
troubleshooting (continued)
parallel port, 3-27
parallel printer, 3-28
power failure, 3-19
serial devices, 3-29
serial port, 3-27
software errors, 3-13
visual signs of problems, 3-3
water damage, 3-18
TSR programs, 3-13, 3-14
typographical conventions, x
U
upgrade options, 1-4
upper memory
address map, 3-17
user’s documentation, x, 5-2
V
video control circuitry, 4-15
video controller, 4-15
video display, 1-4
video functions
about, B-1
testing, 4-15
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Video Hardware Test, B-1
video memory, 2-13
Video Memory Test, B-1
video scan alignment test. See video tests, Text Mode
Character Test
video tests (continued)
Text Mode Character Test, B-1
Text Mode Color Test, B-3
Text Mode Pages Test, B-4
Video Hardware Test, B-1
Video Memory Test, B-1
video subsystem. See Video Test Group
Video Test Group
Dell diagnostics, 4-15
video tests
Color Palettes Test, B-5
Graphics Mode Test, B-4
Solid Colors Test, B-6
W
warnings, x
warranty information, ix
warranty repair or credit, 5-4
water damage, 3-18
Index
9
Dell Latitude XPi CD Reference and Troubleshooting Guide
Adjust this Spine accordingly